Home

WT1800 Precision Power Analyzer Communication Interface Manual

1. 3 4 IM WT1801 17EN 3 3 Connecting to the GP IB Interface CAUTION Be sure to turn off the PC and the WT1800 when connecting or removing communication cables Otherwise erroneous operation may result or the internal circuitry may break IM WT1801 17EN 3 5 e eyieyu grrdo B 3 4 Configuring the WT1800 GP IB Settings This section explains the following setting for controlling the WT1800 remotely through a GP IB interface GP IB address UTILITY Remote Control Menu Press UTILITY the Remote Control soft key and then the GP IB soft key to display the following Screen Utility Eh System Overview Remote Control GPIB GP B Address 1 Network UO USB 7X Network lt Network Set the address 0 to 30 Y D A Dutput Items Bh Note Only use one communication interface GP IB USB or Network If you send commands simultaneously from more than one communication interface the WT1800 will not execute the commands properly When the controller is communicating with the WT1800 or with other devices through GP IB do not change the address Each device that is connected by GP IB has its own unique address in the GP IB system This address is used to distinguish one device from other devices Therefore you must assign a unique address to the WT1800 when connec
2. Sp Rotating speed Tq Torque A1 AUX1 A2 AUX2 INPut SCALing Function Queries all scaling settings Syntax INPut SCALing INPut SCALing STATe Function Queries the on off statuses of the scaling of all elements Syntax INPut SCALing STATe INPut SCALing STATe ALL Function Collectively sets the on off status of the scaling of all elements Syntax INPut SCALing STATe ALL lt Boolean gt Example INPUT SCALING STATE ALL OFF INPut SCALing STATe ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the on off status of the scaling of the specified element Syntax INPut SCALing STATe ELEMent lt x gt lt Boolean gt INPut SCALing STATe ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element INPUT SCALING STATE ELEMENT1 OFF INPUT SCALING STATE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT SCALING STATE ELEMENT1 0 Example INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor Function Queries the VT ratios CT ratios or power coefficients of all elements Syntax INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor spuewwos uoljesiunwwog INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ALL Function Collectively sets the VT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient of all elements Syntax INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ALL lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example INPUT SCALING VT ALL 1 INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor ELEM
3. Command Function Page COPy Group HCOPy Queries all print settings 5 46 HCOPy ABORt Aborts a print operation 5 46 HCOPy AUTO Queries all auto print settings 5 46 HCOPy AUTO COUNt Sets or queries the auto print count 5 46 HCOPy AUTO INTerval Sets or queries the auto print interval 5 46 HCOPy AUTO MODE Sets or queries the auto print operation mode 5 46 HCOPy AUTO PASTart Sets or queries whether printing starts when auto printing starts 5 46 HCOPy AUTO STARt END Sets or queries the printing start or end time for real time printing mode 5 46 HCOPy AUTO STATe Sets or queries the auto print feature s on off status 5 47 COPy AUTO TEVent Sets or queries the event that the event synchronized print mode will trigger 5 47 on HCOPy COMMent Sets or queries the comment displayed at the bottom of the screen 5 47 HCOPy EXECute Executes a print operation 5 47 HCOPy PRINter Queries all print settings for the built in printer 5 47 HCOPy PRINter FEED Executes a paper feed on the built in printer 5 47 HCOPy PRINter FORMat Sets or queries the contents that will be printed from the built in printer 5 47 HOLD Group HOLD Sets or queries the on off status of the output hold feature for display 5 48 communication and other types of data SPeed Group HSPeed Queries all high speed data capturing feature settings 5 49 HS Peed CAPTured Qu
4. YOKOGAWA WT 1800 eost rouen ayze E 8 8 VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE Se gnnm oom vo o AAAH v BEE ii ab pie ES e ford ur DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT oe 9 9 Em m o Co OG m amp 0 olram LJ LY i on Cum E E Power O cn PE M T J UTILITY key page 3 6 Press this key to set the GP IB address SI amp L3 Li 69 ey C L3 P pu eS ge pe gu 4 Een A A A A e A A LT e ms et QO 9 Ole Ole Ls C s ss s K lie Lo m b 3 Tato MAX TO E Im amp put amp pues fino macto O as G Dalm qd Os R GP IB port This port is for connecting the WT1800 to a controller such as a PC using a GP IB cable For details on how to connect the WT1800 to a controller see page 3 4 IM WT1801 17EN 3 1 3 2 GP IB Interface Features Listener Capability GP IB Interface Features and Specifications Allows you to specify the same settings that you can
5. Read the response to OPC INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent lt PMT gt IM WT1801 17EN 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to select which command to apply OPC to Here it is applied to the media access command Because OPC does not generate a response until the overlapping operation is completed the file loading will have been completed by the time the response to OPC is read Note Most commands are sequential commands Overlap commands are indicated as such in chapter 5 All other commands are sequential commands Achieving Synchronization without Using Overlap Commands Even when using sequential commands there are times when it is necessary to achieve synchronization to properly query the measured data For example if you want to query the most recent numeric data each time that the measured data is updated you can attempt to do this by sending the NUMeric NORMal VALue command with some arbitrary timing However because the WT1800 returns the current measured data regardless of whether the measured data has been updated since the previous query this method may return data that is the same as the previous data If this happens you must use the following method to synchronize with the end of measured data updating Using the STATus CONDition query STATus CONDition is used to query the contents of the condition registe
6. Command Function Page INPut Group INPut Queries all input element settings 5 57 NPut CFACtor Sets or queries the crest factor 5 57 NPut CURRent Queries all electric current measurement settings 5 57 NPut CURRent AUTO Queries the electric current auto range on off statuses of all elements 5 57 NPut CURRent AUTO ALL Collectively sets the electric current auto range on off status of all elements 5 57 NPut CURRent AUTO Sets or queries the electric current auto range on off status of the specified 5 57 ELEMent lt x gt element NPut CURRent Collectively sets the electric current auto range on off status of all the 5 57 AUTO SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C NPut CURRent CONFig Queries the valid electric current ranges of all elements 5 57 NPut CURRent CONFig ALL Collectively sets the valid electric current range of all elements 5 57 NPut CURRent CONFig Sets or queries the valid electric current range of the specified element 5 58 ELEMent lt x gt NPut CURRent EXTSensor Queries all external current sensor range settings 5 58 NPut CURRent EXTSensor Queries the valid external current sensor ranges of all elements 5 58 CONFig INPut CURRent EXTSensor Collectively sets the valid external current sensor range of all elements 5 58 CONFig ALL NPut CURRent EXTSensor Sets or queries the valid external current sensor ranges of the specified 5
7. Syntax DISPlay BAR ITEM x SCALing XAXis BOTTom CENTer DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing XAXis lt x gt 1 to 3 item number Example DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 SCALING XAXIS BOTTOM DISPLAY BAR ITEMI SCALING XAXIS gt DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 SCALING XAXIS BOTTOM Description This command is valid when the scaling mode of the bar graph DISPlay BAR ITEM lt X gt SCALing MODE is set to MANual and the vertical scaling mode of the bar graph DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing VERTical is set to LINear DISPlay BAR ORDer Function Sets or queries the displayed starting and ending harmonic orders of the bar graphs Syntax DISPlay BAR ORDer lt NRf gt lt NRf gt DISPlay BAR ORDer First lt NRf gt 0 to 490 displayed Starting harmonic order Second lt NRf gt 10 to 500 displayed ending harmonic order Example DISPLAY BAR ORDER 1 100 DISPLAY BAR ORDER gt DISPLAY BAR ORDER 1 100 Description Set the starting harmonic order and then the ending harmonic order Setthe ending harmonic order to a value greater than or equal to that of the starting harmonic order 10 DISPlay HSPeed Function Queries all high speed data capturing display settings Syntax DISPlay HSPeed Description The bar graph display is only available on models with the high speed data capturing HS option DISPlay HSPeed COLumn Function Queries all column settings of the high speed data
8. data is cleared and the most recent numeric data is held internally When retrieving numeric data continuously this method can be used to circumvent the need to repeatedly set NUMeric HOLD to OFF NUMeric LIST Function Queries all harmonic measurement numeric list data output settings Syntax NUMeric LIST Description This is only valid on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option The number of numeric list data items output by NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt is determined by NUMeric LIST NUMber NUMeric LIST CLEar Function Clears harmonic measurement numeric list data output items sets the items to NONE Syntax NUMeric LIST CLEar ALL lt NRf gt lt NR gt ALL Clear all items First lt NRf gt 1 to 64 the number of the first item to clear Second lt NRf gt 1 to 64 the number of the last item to clear Example NUMERIC LIST CLEAR ALL Description This is only valid on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option e If the second NRf is omitted the output item specified by the first lt NRf gt and all following output items up to number 64 are cleared NUMeric LIST DELete Function Deletes harmonic measurement numeric list data output items Syntax NUMeric LIST DELete lt NRf gt lt NRf gt First lt NRf gt 1 to 64 the number of the first item to delete Second lt NRf gt 1 to 64 the number of the last item to delete
9. 5 37 5 53 trigger posltlOIr o i oerte her Godlee 5 101 trigger slope teet co tte rr irr a 5 37 5 54 trigger S TE iis Pot rtp aee br cup tepr oes aes 5 37 5 54 U upper level query uico iecore dc cct Dci ce USB MUD stissa voa ea ka escis s adeo cni o nene USB interface USB keyboard type user defined event js user defined event expression sssssssssss 5 71 user defined event expression type ssssssse 5 72 user defined event name 5 72 user defined function 5 73 user defined function equation es 5 73 user defined function NAMEC ccceeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseees 5 73 V Page valid electric current range sarsana valid voltage range vector display format Verical POSON t RES Perm voltage auto range ES Voltage mode cete ac ete ect eee tp Voltage alig8 certc sce te recen tete du bANCUMP W Page watt hour integration method for each polarity computation waveform TIMAN isses espns eean a waveform vertical zoom factor waveform display cursor display waveform display data waveform display data display format waveform display Tormal oiii waveform interpolation method waveform label 2 2 prr tt eret recht nane WI
10. 5 16 MOTor Group The commands in this group deal with the motor evaluation function You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing MOTOR AUX SET SHIFT SCALING on the front panel The commands in this group are only valid on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option MOTor Function Queries all motor evaluation function settings Syntax MOTor MOTor EANGle Function Queries all electrical angle measurement settings Syntax MOTor EANGle Description The electrical angle measurement feature is only available on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option MOTor EANG1le CORRection Function Queries all electrical angle correction settings Syntax MOTor EANGle CORRection MOTor EANG1le CORRection AENTer Function Queries all automatic electrical angle correction entry settings Syntax MOTor EANGle CORRection AENTer MOTor EANGle CORRection AENTer EXECute Function Executes an automatic electrical angle correction entry Syntax MOTor EANGle CORRection AENTer EXECute Example MOTOR EANGLE CORRECTION AENTER EXECUTE Description The measured electrical angle of the target source MOTor EANGle CORRection AEN Ter TARGet is entered as the correction value MOTor EANGle CORRection AENTer TARGet Function Sets or queries the target source for automatically entering the electrical angle correction value Syntax MOTor EANGl
11. 6 5 Output and Error Queues Output Queue The output queue stores query response messages For example if you send a WAVeform SEND command which requests for the transmission of acquired waveform data the data is stored in the output queue until it is read As shown below data is stored in order and read from the oldest message first The output queue is cleared in the following cases Anew message is received from the controller Adeadlock occurs see page 4 2 Adevice clear command DCL or SDC is received The instrument is turned off and then back on The CLS command does not clear the output queue You can determine whether the output queue is empty by checking bit 4 MAV in the status byte D2 D1 D1 D2 D1 Error Queue When an error occurs the error queue stores the error number and message For example if the instrument receives an incorrect program message from the controller the error number 113 and the error message Undefined header are stored in the error queue when the instrument displays the error message You can use the STATus ERRor query to read the contents of the error queue Like those in the output queue the messages in the error queue are read from the oldest one first If the error queue overflows the last message is replaced with the following message 350 Queue overflow The error queue is cleared in the followin
12. DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM PAGE 1 Description The maximum page number that can be displayed is determined by the total number of display items and the number of items per page Example DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom PERPage Function Sets or queries the number of items displayed per page of the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom PERPage lt NRf gt DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom PERPage lt NRf gt 1 to the total number of display items DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM PERPAGE 5 DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM PERPAGE DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM PERPAGE 5 Example Description The minimum number of items that can be displayed per page is total number of display items DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom TOTal 12 DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom TOTal Function Sets or queries the total number of display items of the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom TOTal NRf DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom TOTa1 lt NRf gt 1 to 192 number of items Example DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM TOTAL 20 DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM TOTAL DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM TOTAL 20 Description The maximum number of total display items is number of display items per page DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom PERPage x 12 DISPlay NUMeric FRAMe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the numeric display s data section frame Syntax DISPlay NUMeric FRAMe Boolean DISPlay NUMeric F
13. NR Second lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minutes gt lt NRf gt 2001 1 1 0 0 0 to Third NRf 0 to 59 seconds 2099 12 31 23 59 59 Example HCOPY AUTO INTERVAL 0 0 10 First NRf 2001 to 2099 year HCOPY AUTO INTERVAL Second NRf 1 to 12 month HCOPY AUTO INTERVAL 0 0 10 Third lt NRf gt 1 to 31 day Description This command is valid when the auto print Fourth NRf 0 to 23 hour operation mode HCOPy AUTO MODE is set to Fifth NRf 0 to 59 minute INTerval RTIMe or INTEGrate Sixth NRf 0 to 59 second Example HCOPY AUTO START 2011 1 1 0 0 0 HCOPY AUTO START gt HCOPY AUTO START 2011 1 1 0 0 0 Description This command is valid when the auto print operation mode HCOPy AUTO MODE is set to RTIMe 5 46 IM WT1801 17EN 5 9 HCOPy Group HCOPy AUTO STATe Function Sets or queries the auto print feature s on off status Syntax HCOPy AUTO STATe Boolean HCOPy AUTO STATe Example HCOPy AUTO STATE OFF HCOPy AUTO STATE gt HCOPy AUTO STATE 0 HCOPy AUTO TEVent Function Sets or queries the event that the event synchronized print mode will trigger on Syntax HCOPy AUTO TEVent lt NRf gt HCOPy AUTO TEVent lt NRf gt 1 to 8 event number Example HCOPY AUTO TEVENT 1 HCOPY AUTO TEVENT gt HCOPY AUTO TEVENT 1 Description This command is valid when the auto print operation mode HCOPy AUTO MODE is set to EVEN
14. tb rere nre 5 99 model rutmber oerte trt tee egens 5 99 motor evaluation function 5 75 motor output 5 75 motor output computation scaling factor es 5 76 motor poles numbers of rete nere i 5 76 rioving average COUR nre eripere eeeta 5 70 N Page normal integration mode 5 67 hi m 4 7 NULE m 5 62 number of data captures sssssssssseeene 5 49 numeric data 5 80 numeric data format eseeeeeeeessssseeeeeeeees 5 80 5 87 numeric data output item 2 nete 5 86 numeric data storing at the start of storage 5 96 numeric display format 5 30 numeric display in 4 Items 8 Items or 16 Items mode display ge 5 33 numeric display in custom display mode display item 5 27 numeric display in list display modes display item 5 30 numeric display in matrix display mode display item 5 32 O Page OPUOM P A T TA T ENE 5 103 OUPULGUSUG et 6 6 overlap comimahd iir e ti ere t a pee v 4 8 P Page ejeraipp e 5 47 ud 5 74 peak Over ralige isi reet n N aa 5 63 peak over range information sssusss 5 50 5 51 phase difference display format ssssssssse 5 74 PLL source power COeffICIOnt acris etos cce nive pris 5 63 PUNE COUN eR 5 46 printing scheduled start a
15. NUMeric HSPeed DELete Function Deletes high speed data capturing mode numeric list data output items Syntax NUMeric HSPeed DELete lt NRf gt L NR First lt NRf gt 1 to 30 the number of the first item to delete Second lt NRf gt 1 to 30 the number of the last item to delete Example NUMERIC HSPEED DELETE1 Deletes ITEM1 and shifts ITEM2 and subsequent items forward NUMERIC HSPEED DELETE 1 3 Deletes ITEM1 to ITEM3 and shifts ITEM4 and subsequent items forward Description This command is only valid on models with thehigh speed data capturing HS option The positions of deleted output items are filled by the items that follow them and empty sections at the end are set to NONE Ifthe second lt NRf gt is omitted only the output item specified by the first lt NRf gt is deleted 5 80 IM WT1801 17EN 5 17 NUMeric Group NUMeric HSPeed HEADer Function Queries the header of the numeric data of high speed data capturing mode Syntax NUMeric HSPeed HEADer lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 30 item number Example When lt NRf gt is specified NUMERIC HSPEED HEADER 1 gt U El1 When NRf is omitted when NUMeric HSPeed NUMber is set to 3 NUMERIC HSPEED HEADER gt U El I El P El Description This command is only valid on models with the high speed data capturing HS option The data name header of the output item is generated f lt N
16. NUMERIC LIST DELETE 1 Deletes ITEM1 and shifts ITEM2 and subsequent spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 Example items forward NUMERIC LIST DELETE 1 3 Deletes ITEM1 to ITEM3 and shifts ITEM4 and subsequent items forward Description This is only valid on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option The positions of deleted output items are filled by the items that follow them and empty sections at the end are set to NONE If the second lt NRf gt is omitted only the output item specified by the first lt NRf gt is deleted IM WT1801 17EN 5 83 5 17 NUMeric Group NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt Function Sets or queries the output item function and element of the specified harmonic measurement numeric list data item Syntax NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 64 item number NONE No output item Function U I P S Q LAMBda PHI PHIU PHII Z RS XS RP XP UHDF IHDF PHDF lt Element gt NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt NRf gt 1 to 6 NUMERIC LIST ITEM1 U 1 NUMERIC LIST ITEM1 gt NUMERIC LIST ITEM1 U 1 Description This is only valid on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option For information about the options available for Function see Function Option List 2 on page 5 41 Example NUMeric LIST NUMber Function Sets or queries the number o
17. ssessssss 5 24 7 5 075 05 0 UU TUM t Tem bar graph display cursor display ssssssse 5 21 bar graph display format F bak graphite 2a ERES 5 293 cfle list TIGE iei Ere ioc eee acne block datas ten ette etie re ces e ta Had 4 7 files SAVING i p reitera HR Gere ED etd DOGS m 4 T fOnlslZe cse ronem cem dr cb t reas TO QU GM OY SERERE em C Page frequency filter OAL a E En naa PRUE NEY MeaSUrEMENT siririna ote front pahiel iai ERE 1 1 2 1 3 1 calibration 5 102 function options 5 38 PASSE GF GRIF ere e 4 FUMCHION options ssseseeeennnnneennne character notations duoi esein Dentes mae se aqoa iv G Page columns number Of rrr rrr rite ease 5 31 5 49 command GET Group Execute Trigget 2 2 eee 3 7 COMMEN iissa rer ne rrr rre neri Fear GPB board remet rer 3 4 COMMON COMMAMNG header rnnt rn cerne A3 GPAIBSIMG cte 3 2 condition register s 22 0 5s cceceecuscdedosatiaceneeecteanscahida aiaiai 5 93 graticule scale idee et titii ndn 5 35 continuous integration mode sssssssees 5 67 Greenwich mean time ssssssssssseeee 5 97 Corrected Power ws grid brightness NES TaCIOE oisi eren TEL det E idet d e Edu ra Aaea EEE CSV CONV TS ON atiesa aeie GTL Go TO LOGA Jezisa 2 ertet te eaten 3 7 CT ratio e current H Page current mode cte m Pas
18. 5 80 549 CRATE GOUD ftare certet furicR UNUM eats teatetende ca cequte EE IS SLIDE UTE 5 92 5 19 STATUS GrOUD e e ne e nete e iat editi ae ees 5 93 9 20 STORG Grou t Si 5 94 IM WT1801 17EN Contents Chapter 6 Appendix Index 5 21 SYS TM Group M ieee 5 97 5 22 WAVE TON OEOUD eie rtt ete ete rdiet e vee cat ueri cad eesti genaces 5 100 5 23 Common Command Group codi ecce e c eec certa decane eked eR cien Rte e n e X RR 5 102 Status Reports 6 1 ADOUt Status Reports ciens chinese ex cades terree cR dia as see RR Lee EE EX aed tiene 6 1 6 2 Status Byle eiie treu toe etae rede ar ne a b te aera e t e niter eei nid 6 3 6 3 Standard Event Register 2 inei etri hito eo aE Pea dte Reed a eERA 6 4 6 4 Extended Event Reglster eerte ee tete hne at Ren Esa ra dtr anre iaaii 6 5 6 5 Output and Error Quelles oin eoe cte e ref E Eee c ea 6 6 Appendix Emor Messages iine een Ede te dede a Die De ali App 1 Appendix 2 About the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard sse App 4 vi IM WT1801 17EN Chapter 1 Ethernet Interface 1 1 Front Panel Component Names and Functions LOCAL key Press this key to switch from remote mode in which settings and operations are performed through remote commands to local mode in which operations can be performed using the WT1800 keys
19. Element NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt NR gt 1 to 6 Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ITEM1 U 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ITEM1 gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ITEM1 U 1 Description For information about the options available for lt Function gt see Function Option List 2 on page 5 41 5 30 IM WT1801 17EN 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ORDer Function Sets or queries the harmonic order cursor position of the data section on the numeric display in the list display modes Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ORDer NRf DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ORDer lt NRf gt 1 to 500 harmonic order DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ORDER 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ORDER gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST ORDER 1 Description This command is valid when the cursor position DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST CURSor on the numeric display in the list display modes is set to ORDer Example DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix Function Queries all numeric display settings in matrix display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix COLumn Function Queries all column settings of the numeric display in matrix display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix COLumn DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix COLumn ITEM lt x gt Function Sets or queries the specified col
20. Let us assume you send the next program message when you want to load a file and query the voltage range of the result FILE LOAD SETup FILEI INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 In this case INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 is executed before the loading of the file is completed and the voltage range that is returned is the value before the file is loaded Overlapping refers to the act of executing the next command before the processing of the current command is completed such as in the command FILE LOAD SETup A command that operates in this way is called an overlap command You can prevent overlapping by using the following methods Synchronizing to Overlap Commands Using the WAI command The WAI command holds the subsequent commands until the overlap command is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H0040 FILE LOAD SETup FILE1 WAI INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 lt PMT gt The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to select which command to apply WAT to Here it is applied to the media access command WAI is executed before INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 so INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 is not executed until the file loading is completed Using the COMMunicate OVERlap command The COMMunicate OVERlap command enables or disables overlapping Example COMMunicate OVERlap HFF
21. RST Function Syntax Example Returns ASCII code 1 if the specified overlap command has finished OPC OPC gt 1 For information about how to synchronize a program using OPC see page 4 8 The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command If OPC is not the last command of the message its operation is not guaranteed Queries the installed options OPT OPT EX6 B5 G5 DT FQ V1 DA MTR Returns the presence of the following options the external current sensor input option EX1 for the WT1801 EX2 for the WT1802 EX3 for the WT1803 EX4 for the WT1804 EX5 for the WT1805 and EX6 for the WT 1806 the built in printer B5 the harmonic measurement option G5 the simultaneous dual harmonic measurement option G6 the delta computation option DT the add on frequency measurement option FQ the RGB output option V1 the 20 channel D A output option DA the motor evaluation function MTR the auxiliary input option AUX and high speed data capturing option HS If none of the options are installed ASCII code 0 is returned The OPT query must be the last query of a program message An error occurs if there is a query after the OPT query Initializes the settings RST RST Description Also clears OPC and OPC commands that have been sent All settings except communication settings are reset to their factory default values SRE Function Syntax Examp
22. Syntax Example Collectively sets the jump destination range of all elements that is used when a voltage peak over range occurs INPut VOLTage POJump ALL OFF lt Voltage gt OFF No jump destination voltage range When the crest factor is set to 3 Voltage 1 5 V 3 V 6 V 10 V 15 V 30 V 60 V 100 V 150 V 300 V 600 V 1000 V When the crest factor is set to 6 Voltage 0 75 V 1 5 V 3 V 5 V 7 5 V 15 V 30 V 50 V 75 V 150 V 300 V 500 V INPUT VOLTAGE POJUMP ALL OFF INPut VOLTage POJump ELEMent lt x gt Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the jump destination range of the specified element that is used when a voltage peak over range occurs INPut VOLTage POJump ELEMent lt x gt OFF lt Voltage gt INPut VOLTage POJump ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element OFF No jump destination voltage range lt Voltage gt See INPut VOLTage POJump ALL INPUT VOLTAGE POJUMP ELEMENT1 1000V INPUT VOLTAGE POJUMP ELEMENT1 gt INPUT VOLTAGE POJUMP ELEMENT1 1 0000E 03 INPut VOLTage RANGe Function Syntax Queries the voltage ranges of all elements INPut VOLTage RANGe INPut VOLTage RANGe ALL Function Syntax Example Collectively sets the voltage range of all elements INPut VOLTage RANGe ALL lt Voltage gt When the crest factor is set to 3 Voltage 1 5 V 3 V 6 V 10 V 15 V 30 V
23. are omitted from responses to functions that do not need them UO wn mj as ERIC NORMAL MATRIX as NORMAL MATRIX E B s Pos Q las ERIC NORMAL MATRIX Qu ss Us Us U EF as DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix PAGE Function Sets or queries the displayed page of the numeric display in matrix display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix PAGE lt NRf gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix PAGE lt NRf gt 1 to 9 page number Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX PAGE gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX PAGE Description When the page number is set the cursor position moves to the beginning of the page DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix PRESet Function Syntax Example Description Presets the display order pattern of displayed items on the numeric display in matrix display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix PRESet lt NRf gt EORigin FORigin CLRPage CLRA11 lt NRf gt 1 or EORigin element reference reset pattern Element Origin lt NRf gt 2 or FORigin function reference reset pattern Function Origin lt NRf gt 3 or CLRPage clear the display items of the current page Clear Current Page lt NRf gt 4 or CLRAI11 clear the display items of all pages Clear All Pages DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX PR
24. 19 20 21 22 23 Communication between devices that do not follow the response syntax Not supported Size of the response data block 1 to 2000000 bytes A list of supported common commands See section 5 23 Common Command Group Device condition after a successful calibration The device will be performing measurements The maximum length of block data that can be used for the DDT trigger macro definition Not supported The maximum length of the macro label for defining macros the maximum length of block data that can be used for the macro definition and the process when recursion is used in macro definitions Macro functions are not supported Reply to the IDN query See section 5 23 Common Command Group Size of storage area for protected user data for PUD and PUD PUD and PUD are not supported The length of the RDT and RDT resource names RDT and RDT are not supported The change in the status due to RST LRN RCL and SAV RST See section 5 23 Common Command Group LRN RCL and SAV These common commands are not supported The extent of the self test using the TST command Performs the same internal memory test that is executed when the user presses UTILITY and then the Self Test soft key and executes the MEMORY test The structure of the extended return status See chapter 6 Whether each command is processed in an overlapped manner or sequentially
25. COMMunicate WAIT Function Waits for a specified extended event to occur Syntax COMMunicate WAIT Register Register 0 to 65535 Extended event register For more information see page 6 5 Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 1 Description For information about how to synchronize a program using COMMunicate WAIT see page 4 9 COMMunicate WAIT Function Creates the response that is returned when a specified extended event occurs Syntax COMMunicate WAIT Register Register 0 to 65535 Extended event register For more information see page 6 5 Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 65535 gt 1 5 20 IM WT1801 17EN 5 5 CURSor Group The commands in this group deal with cursor measurements You can make the same settings and queries of settings and measured values that you can make by pressing CURSOR SHIFT FORM on the front panel CURSor Function Queries all cursor measurement settings Syntax CURSor CURSor BAR Function Queries all bar graph display cursor measurement settings Syntax CURSor BAR Description The bar graph display s cursor feature is only available on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option CURSor BAR LINKage Function Sets or queries the on off status of the cursor position linkage on the bar graph display Syntax CURSor BAR LINKage Boolean CURSor BAR LINKage Example CURSOR BAR LINKAGE OFF CURSOR BAR LINKAGE gt CURSOR
26. CONDITION 1 AND 2 Description This command is valid when the expression type MEASure EVENt lt x gt EXPRession TYPE is set to CONDition Example spuewwos uoljesiunwwog MEASure EVENt x EXPRession INVerse Function Sets or queries the on off status of the logic inversion of the specified user defined event s expression compound condition type Syntax MEASure EVENt x EXPRession NVerse Boolean MEASure EVENt x EXPRession NVerse x 1 to 8 Eventi to Event8 Example MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION NVERSE OFF MEASURE EVENTI EXPRESSION NVERSE gt MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION INVERSE 0 Description This command is valid when the expression type MEASure EVENt lt x gt EXPRession TYPE is set to CONDition IM WT1801 17EN 5 71 5 15 MEASure Group MEASure EVENt lt x gt EXPRession ITEM Function Sets or queries the target item of the specified user defined event s expression range defined type Syntax MEASure EVENt x EXPRession ITEM lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt MEASure EVENt lt x gt EXPRession ITEM x 1 to 8 Eventl to Event8 Function URMS IRMS P S Q Element NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt NRf gt 1 to 6 Order TOTal DC lt NR gt lt NRf gt 1 to 500 MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION ITEM URMS MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION ITEM gt MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION ITEM URMS Descripti
27. Example When NRf is specified NUMERIC NORMAL VALUE 1 gt 103 79E 00 e When lt NRf gt is omitted NUMERIC NORMAL VALUE 103 79E 00 1 0143E 00 105 27E 00 omitted 1 428E 00 When NUMeric FORMat is set to FLOat NUMERIC NORMAL VALUE gt N N digit byte number data byte Sequence Description If lt NRf gt is specified only the numeric data for the specified item is output e If NRf is omitted the numeric data items from 1 to the number specified by the NUMeric NORMal NUMber command are output in order Forthe formats of the individual numeric data items that are output see Numeric Data Formats at the end of this group of commands page 5 87 5 86 IM WT1801 17EN 5 17 NUMeric Group Numeric Data Formats 1 Normal Data 2 The of electric power values P S and Q Integrated values WH WHP WHM AH AHP AHM WS and WQ Efficiency values ETA1 ETA2 ETA3 and ETA4 harmonic distortion factor values UHDFk IHDFk and PHDFk and distortion factor values UTHD ITHD and PTHD ASCII lt NR3 gt format mantissa up to 6 digits exponent 2 digits Example 123 456E 00 FLOAT IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format Elapsed integration time TIME ASCII lt NR1 gt format in units of seconds Example 3600 for 1 hour 1 00 00 FLOAT IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format in units of seconds Example 0x45610000 for 1 ho
28. Example INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO ALL ON INPut VOLTage AUTO ELEMent x Function Sets or queries the voltage auto range on off status of the specified element Syntax INPut VOLTage AUTO ELEMent x lt Boolean gt INPut VOLTage AUTO ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element Example INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO ELEMENT1 ON INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO ELEMENT1 gt INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO ELEMENT1 1 INPut VOLTage AUTO SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Function Collectively sets the voltage auto range on off status of all the elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C Syntax INPut VOLTage AUTO SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt Boolean gt Example INPUT VOLTAGE AUTO SIGMA ON Description SIGMA SIGMB or SIGMC is invalid if the wiring system setting INPut WIRing is made in such a way that the corresponding wiring unit 2A 2B or 2C does not exist INPut VOLTage CONFig Function Queries the valid voltage ranges of all elements Syntax INPut VOLTage CONFig 5 64 IM WT1801 17EN 5 13 INPut Group INPut VOLTage CONFig ALL Function Syntax Example Description Collectively sets the valid voltage range of all elements INPut VOLTage CONFig ALL ALL lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt ALL All ranges are valid When the crest factor is set to 3 Voltage 1 5 V 3 V 6 V 10 V 15 V 30 V 60 V 100 V 150 V 300 V 600 V 10
29. G5 or G6 option Asingle numeric list data item consists of up to 502 items of numeric data in the following order TOTal DC 1st order NUMeric LIST ORDer f lt NRf gt is specified only the numeric list data of the specified item number is output up to 502 items of data f lt NRf gt is omitted the numeric list data of item numbers from 1 to NUMeric LIST NUMber is output in order up to 502 times the number specified by NUMeric LIST NUMber For the formats of the individual numeric data items that are output see Numeric Data Formats at the end of this group of commands page 5 87 NUMeric NORMal1 Function Queries all numeric data output settings Syntax NUMeric NORMal Description The number of numeric data items output by NUMeric NORMal ITEM lt x gt is determined by NUMeric NORMal NUMber NUMeric NORMal CLEar Function Syntax Example Description Clears numeric data output items sets the items to NONE NUMeric NORMal CLEar ALL NRf NRf ALL Clear all items First NRf 1 to 255 the number of the first item to clear Second NRf 1 to 255 the number of the last item to clear NUMERIC NORMAL CLEAR ALL If the 2nd lt NRf gt is omitted the output item specified by the first lt NRf gt and all following output items up to number 255 are cleared NUMeric NORMal DELete Function Syntax Example Description Del
30. SCALing VALue x to 16 item number lt NRf gt 9 999E 12 to 9 999E 12 Example DISPLAY TREND ITEMI SCALING VALUE 100 100 DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 SCALING VALUE gt DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 SCALING VALUE 100 0E 00 100 0E 00 Description Set the upper limit and then the lower limit This command is valid when the scaling mode of the trend DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing MODE is set to MANual DISPlay TRENd T lt x gt Function Sets or queries the on off status of the specified trend Syntax DISPlay TRENd T x Boolean DISPlay TRENd T lt x gt x 1 to 16 item number Example DISPLAY TREND T1 ON DISPLAY TREND T1 gt DISPLAY TREND T1 1 5 34 IM WT1801 17EN 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay TRENd TDIV Function Sets or queries the trend horizontal axis T div Syntax DISPlay TRENd TDIV lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt DISPlay TRENd TDIV lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0 3 to 24 0 0 First lt NRf gt 1 3 6 12 24 hours Second lt NRf gt 1 3 6 10 30 minutes Third lt NRf gt 3 6 10 30 seconds Example DISPLAY TREND TDIV 0 0 3 DISPLAY TREND TDIV gt DISPLAY TREND TDIV 0 0 3 Description Set the three lt NRf gt s so that one lt NRf gt is a non zero value and the other two are zero DISPlay VECTor Function Queries all vector display settings Syntax DISPlay VECTor Description T
31. STATe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the backlight Syntax SYSTem LCD STATe Boolean SYSTem LCD STATe Example SYSTEM LCD STATE ON SYSTEM LCD STATE gt SYSTEM LCD STATE 1 SYSTem MODe1 Function Queries the model code Syntax SYSTem MODe1 Example SYSTEM MODEL gt SYSTEM MODEL WT1806 Description Returns the text that appears next to Model on the System Overview screen which can be accessed by pressing UTILITY SYSTem RESolution Function Sets or queries the numeric data display resolution Syntax SYSTem RESolution NRf SYSTem RESolution lt NRf gt 4 5 digits Example SYSTEM RESOLUTION 5 SYSTEM RESOLUTION gt SYSTEM RESOLUTION 5 O SYSTem SERial 3 Function Queries the serial number 3 Syntax SYSTem SERial 5 Example SYSTEM SERIAL gt S SYSTEM SERIAL 123456789 9 Description Returns the text that appears next to No on the Oo System Overview screen which can be accessed 3 by pressing UTILITY i a SYSTem SUFFix n Function Queries the suffix code Syntax SYSTem SUFFix Example SYSTEM SUFFIX gt SYSTEM SUFFIX 33 M HE EX6 B5 G6 DT FQ V1 DA MTR Description Returns the text that appears next to Suffix on the System Overview screen which can be accessed by pressing UTILITY SYSTem TIME Function Sets or queries the time Syntax SYSTem TIME String SYSTem TIME String HH MM SS HH hour M
32. URSor Q EADer The cursor moves to the eader section data concerning all e H h the harmonics left side of the Screen ORDer The cursor moves to the data section numeric data of each harmonic right side of the screen DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST URSOR ORDER DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST URSOR gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST URSOR ORDER Example Q Q Q DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST HEADer Function Sets or queries the cursor position of the header section on the numeric display in the list display modes Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST HEADer NRf DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST HEADer lt NRf gt 1 to 155 header row DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST EADER 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST EADER gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL LIST HEADER 1 Example Description This command is valid when the cursor position DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST CURSor on the numeric display in the list display modes is set to HEADer DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ITEM lt x gt Function Sets or queries the specified display item function and element on the numeric display in the list display modes Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ITEM lt x gt lt Function gt lt Element gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 or 2 item number Function U I P S Q LAMBda PHI PHIU PHII Z RS XS RP XP
33. 60 V 100 V 150 V 300 V 600 V 1000 V When the crest factor is set to 6 Voltage 0 75 V 1 5 V 3 V 5 V 7 5 V 15 V 30 V 50 V 75 V 150 V 300 V 500 V INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ALL 1000V IM WT1801 17EN 5 65 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 13 INPut Group INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent x Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the voltage range of the specified element INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent lt x gt lt Voltage gt INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element Voltage See INPut VOLTage RANGe ALL INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ELEMENT1 1000V INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ELEMENT1 1 000E 03 INPut VOLTage RANGe SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Function Syntax Example Description Collectively sets the voltage range of all the elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C INPut VOLTage RANGe SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Voltage Voltage See INPut VOLTage RANGe ALL INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE SIGMA 1000V SIGMA SIGMB or SIGMC is invalid if the wiring system setting INPut WIRing is made in such a way that the corresponding wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C does not exist INPut WIRing Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the wiring system INPut WIRing P1W2 P1W3 P3W3 P3W4 V3A3 P1W2 P1W3 P3W3 P3W4 V3A3 P1W2 P1W3 P3W3 P3W4
34. BAR LINKAGE 0 CURSor BAR POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries the position of the specified cursor on the bar graph display Syntax CURSor BAR POSition x lt NRf gt CURSor BAR POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 1 Cl 2 C2 x lt NRf gt 0 to 500 Example CURSOR BAR POSITION1 1 CURSOR BAR POSITION1 gt CURSOR BAR POSITION1 1 CURSor BAR STATe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the cursor display on the bar graph display Syntax CURSor BAR STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor BAR STATe Example CURSOR BAR STATE ON CURSOR BAR STATE gt CURSOR BAR STATE 1 CURSor BAR Y lt x gt DY Function Syntax Example Description When multiple bar graphs are displayed the CURSor TRENd Function Syntax CURSor TRENd LINKage Function Syntax Example Queries the measured value of the specified cursor on the bar graph display CURSor BAR Y lt x gt DY Y x Y axis value of the cursor position Yl Yl YZ Y3 Y2 Ylx Y2 x Y3 x DY Difference between the cursor Y axis values DY1 DY2 DY3 CURSOR BAR Y1 gt 78 628E 00 cursor measured values of each bar graph are returned in order Ifthe bar graph cursor display is not turned on NAN Not A Number is returned Queries all trend display cursor measurement settings CURSor TRENd spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 Sets or quer
35. COMMunicate Group COMMunicate Queries all communication settings 5 19 COMMunicate HEADer Sets or queries whether a header is added to the response to a query 5 19 Example with header DISPLAY MODE NUMERIC Example without header NUMERIC COMMunicate LOCKout Sets or clears local lockout 5 19 COMMunicate OPSE Sets or queries the overlap command that is used by the OPC OPC and 5 19 WAI commands COMMunicate OPSR Queries the operation pending status register 5 19 COMMunicate OVERlap Sets or queries the commands that operate as overlap commands 5 19 COMMunicate REMote Sets the WT1800 to remote or local mode On is remote mode 5 20 COMMunicate VERBose Sets or queries whether the response to a query is returned fully spelled 5 20 out example INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ELEMENT1 1 000E 03 or in its abbreviated form example VOLT RANG ELEM 1 000E 03 COMMunicate WAIT Waits for a specified extended event to occur 5 20 COMMunicate WAIT Creates the response that is returned when a specified extended event 5 20 occurs CURSor Group CURSor Queries all cursor measurement settings 5 21 CURSor BAR Queries all bar graph display cursor measurement settings 5 21 CURSor BAR LINKage Sets or queries the on off status of the cursor position linkage on the bar 5 21 graph display CURSor BAR POSition lt x gt Sets or queries the po
36. FILTer LINE Function Sets or queries the line filter for the auxiliary inputs Syntax AUX lt x gt FILTer LINE OFF lt Frequency gt AUX lt x gt FILTer LINE OFF Line filter off lt Frequency gt 100 Hz 1 kHz when the line filter is on cutoff frequency Example AUX FILTER LINE OFF AUX FILTER LINE gt AUX1 FILTER LINE OFF Description The lt x gt value in AUX lt x gt has no meaning in the setting or query AUX lt x gt LSCale Function Queries all auxiliary input linear scaling settings Syntax AUX x LSCale x 1 or 2 AUX input channel AUX lt x gt LSCale AVALue Function Sets or queries the slope A of the linear scale of the auxiliary input feature Syntax AUX lt x gt LSCale AVALue NRf AUX lt x gt LSCale AVALue lt x gt 1 or 2 AUX input channel lt NR gt 1 000E 03 to 1 000E 06 Example AUX1 LSCALE AVALUE 1 000 UX1 LSCALE AVALUE gt AUX1 LSCALE AVALUE 1 000E 00 x AUX lt x gt LSCale BVALue Function Sets or queries the offset B of the linear scale of the auxiliary input feature Syntax AUX lt x gt LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt gt AUX lt x gt LSCale BVALue lt x gt 1 or 2 AUX input channel lt NRf gt 1 000E 06 to 1 000E 06 Example AUX1 LSCALE BVALUE 0 AUX1 LSCALE BVALUE gt AUX1 LSCALE BVALUE 0 000E 00 spuewwos uoljesiunwwog AUX lt x gt LSCale CALCulate Function Queries all paramet
37. Function Queries the specified user defined event s expression as a string Syntax MEASure EVENt x EXPRession STRing x 1 to 8 Eventl to Events MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION STRING gt TEMP 100 00000 Description If there is no expression No Expression is returned Example MEASure EVENt x EXPRession TYPE Function Sets or queries the specified user defined event s expression type Syntax MEASure EVENt x EXPRession TYPE RANGe CONDition MEASure EVENt x EXPRession TYPE x 1 to 8 Eventl to Event8 RANGe Range defined type CONDition Compound event type MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION TYPE RANGE MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION TYPE gt MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION TYPE RANGE Example MEASure EVENt lt x gt FLABel Function Sets or queries the string that is displayed when the specified user defined event s condition is not met Syntax MEASure EVENt lt x gt FLABel lt String gt MEASure EVENt lt x gt FLABel x 1 to 8 Eventl to Event8 A A String gt Up to 6 characters MEASURE EVENT1 FLABEL False MEASURE EVENT1 FLABEL gt MEASURE EVENT1 FLABEL False Example MEASure EVENt lt x gt NAME Function Sets or queries the specified user defined event s name Syntax MEASure EVENt lt x gt NAME lt String gt MEASure EVENt lt x gt NAME x 1 to 8 Eventl to Event8 String gt Up
38. Function Sets or queries the torque signal input type Syntax MOTor TORQue TYPE ANALog PULSe MOTor TORQue TYPE Example MOTOR TORQUE TYPE ANALOG MOTOR TORQUE TYPE gt MOTOR TORQUE TYPE ANALOG MOTor TORQue UNIT Function Sets or queries the unit that is added to the torque computation result Syntax MOTor TORQue UNIT String MOTor TORQue UNIT lt String gt Up to 8 characters Example MOTOR TORQUE UNIT Nm MOTOR TORQUE UNIT gt MOTOR TORQUE UNIT Nm Description This command has no effect on the computation result IM WT1801 17EN 5 79 5 17 NUMeric Group The command in this group deal with numeric data output There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group The commands in the DISPlay group are used to make the same settings and queries as the NUMERIC key on the front panel NUMeric Function Queries all numeric data output settings Syntax NUMeric NUMeric FORMat Function Sets or queries the numeric data format Syntax NUMeric FORMat ASCii FLOat NUMeric FORMat NUMERIC FORMAT ASCII NUMERIC FORMAT gt NUMERIC FORMAT ASCII Description The format of the numeric data that is output varies depending on how this command is set The different formats are explained below 1 When the format is set to ASCii Physical values are output in lt NR3 gt format Only the elapsed integration time TIME is output in lt NR1 g
39. NETWork RAM Built in RAM drive USB USB memory device drive lt NRf gt 0 or 1 drive number NETWork Network drive Example IMAGE SAVE DRIVE RAM IMAGe SAVE FREE Function Queries the free space in bytes on the drive that the screen image data is saved to Syntax IMAGe SAVE FREE Example IMAGE SAVE FREE gt 20912128 IM WT1801 17EN 5 55 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 12 IMAGe Group IMAGe SAVE NAME Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the name of the file that will be saved IMAGe SAVE NAME String IMAGe SAVE NAME String File name IMAGE SAVE NAME IMAGE1 IMAGE SAVE NAME gt IMAGE SAVE NAME IMAGE1 Description Use the IMAGe SAVE DRIVe command to set the save destination drive and the IMAGe SAVE CDIRectory command to set the directory You can query the path that screen image data is saved to by using the IMAGe SAVE PATH command Specify the file name without an extension IMAGe SAVE PATH Function Queries the absolute path of the directory that the screen image data is saved to Syntax IMAGe SAVE PATH Example IMAGE SAVE PATH gt USB 0 IMAGE IMAGe SEND Function Queries the screen image data Syntax IMAGe SEND Example IMAGE SEND gt N N digit byte number data byte sequence Description N the number of digits in the data byte number varies depending on the output data
40. RATE Sets or queries the data update rate 5 92 STATus Group STATus Queries all the settings for the communication status feature 5 93 STATus CONDition Queries the contents of the condition register 5 93 STATus EESE Sets or queries the extended event enable register 5 93 STATus EESR Queries the contents of the extended event register and clears the register 5 93 STATus ERRor Queries the error code and message of the last error that has occurred top 5 93 of the error queue STATus FILTer lt x gt Sets or queries the transition filter 5 93 STATus QENable Sets or queries whether messages other than errors will be stored to the 5 93 error queue ON OFF STATus OMESsage Sets or queries whether message information will be attached to the 5 93 response to the STATus ERRor query ON OFF STATus SPOL1 Executes serial polling 5 93 STORe Group STORe Queries all numeric data storage settings 5 94 STORe COUNt Sets or queries the storage count 5 94 STORe FILE Queries all settings related to the saving of the data stored in the WT1800 to 5 94 files STORe FILE ANAMing Sets or queries the auto naming feature for saving stored numeric data to 5 94 files STORe FILE CDIRectory Changes the directory that stored numeric data is saved to 5 94 STORe FILE CONVert Queries all settings related to the conversion of stored numeric data files into 5 94 CSV format STORe FILE CONVert ABOR
41. Response to acquired waveform data 40012ABCDEFGHIJKL Decimal Decimal indicates a value expressed as a decimal number as shown in the table below Decimal values are written in the NR form as specified in ANSI X3 42 1975 Symbol Meaning Example NR1 Integer 125 i 1000 NR2 Fixed point number 125 0 90 001 lt NR3 gt Floating point number 125 0E 0 9E 1 1E4 lt NRf gt Any form from lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt The WT1800 can receive decimal values that are sent from the controller in any form from lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt This is expressed as lt NRf gt The WT1800 returns a response to the controller in one of the forms from lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt depending on the query The same form is used regardless of the size of the value For the lt NR3 gt form the plus sign after the E can be omitted You cannot omit the minus sign Symbol Word Multiplier EX Exa 108 PE Peta 1015 T Tera 1012 G Giga 10 MA Mega 106 K Kilo 108 M Milli 103 U Micro 10 9 N Nano 107 P Pico 10712 F Femto 10 15 Unit Units that you can use are indicated in the following table Symbol Word Meaning V Volt Voltage A Ampere Current S Second Time HZ Hertz Frequency MHZ Megahertz Frequency lt Multiplier gt and Unit are not case sensitive e U is used to indicate micro p e MA is used for Mega to distinguish it from Milli However
42. Syntax SYSTem DPOint PERiod COMMa SYSTem DPOint Example SYSTEM DPOINT PERIOD SYSTEM DPOINT gt SYSTEM DPOINT PERIOD SYSTem ECLear Function Clears error messages displayed on the screen Syntax SYSTem ECLear Example SYSTEM ECLEAR IM WT1801 17EN 5 97 5 21 SYSTem Group SYSTem FONT Function Sets or queries the menu and message font size Syntax SYSTem FONT SMAL1 LARGe SYSTem FONT Example SYSTEM FONT LARGE SYSTEM FONT gt SYSTEM FONT LARGE SYSTem KLOCk Function Sets or queries the on off status of the key lock Syntax SYSTem KLOCk Boolean SYSTem KLOCk Example SYSTEM KLOCK OFF SYSTEM KLOCK gt SYSTEM KLOCK 0 SYSTem LANGuage Function Queries all display language settings Syntax SYSTem LANGuage SYSTem LANGuage MENU Function Sets or queries the menu language Syntax SYSTem LANGuage MENU JAPANese ENGLish CHINese GERMan SYSTem LANGuage MENU Example SYSTEM LANGUAGE MENU ENGLISH SYSTEM LANGUAGE MENU gt SYSTEM LANGUAGE MENU ENGLISH SYSTem LANGuage MESSage Function Sets or queries the message language Syntax SYSTem LANGuage MESSage JAPANese ENGLish CHINese GERMan SYSTem LANGuage MESSage Example SYSTEM LANGUAGE MESSAGE ENGLISH SYSTEM LANGUAGE MESSAGE SYSTEM LANGUAGE MESSAGE ENGLISH SYSTem LCD Function Queries all LCD settings Syntax SYSTem LCD SYSTem LCD AOFF
43. This key is disabled when local lockout see page 1 2 has been activated by a controller YOKOGAWA WT1800 sw re mavzer oS POWER EXT SENSOR um conris 9o VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE oo napa QD gon y LLELELEL V Cw A ma ore ITEM amp ELEMENT 1 e ih DISPLAY 2 x GE Eee 0 e em C5 ey ri 0 LITITITTITITTIT m o Li E E ETE UTILITY key page 1 5 Press this key to set the network connection timeout setting 97 E G G G G G OF PUE ee a PUT A sr e l l a A A o Ai TEE ITELE TNE Dmoz Luevewx ETERNI Ap A EXT A EXT NEXT Av ext AET nm lesa dam ov us oem
44. WAVeform HOLD is set to ON before WAVeform SEND is executed all the waveform data at that point can be held internally As long as WAVeform HOLD is set to ON waveform data is held even when the waveform display on the screen is updated For example if you want to acquire U1 and 11 waveform display data at the same point in time use the following commands WAVeform HOLD ON WAVeform TRACe U1 Example Syntax WAVeform WAVeform lt NRf gt 0 WAVEFORM WAVEFORM WAVEFORM Example END NRf END to 1601 END 1601 END gt END 1601 WAVeform SEN D Receive the waveform display data of U1 WAVeform TRA WAVeform SEN Ce Il D Receive the waveform display data of 11 WAVeform HOL D OFF WAVeform FORMat Function Sets or queries the format of the waveform display data that is transmitted by the WAVeform SEND command Syntax WAVeform FORMat ASCii FLOat WAVeform FORMat WAVEFORM FORMAT FLOAT WAVEFORM FORMAT WAVEFORM FORMAT FLOAT Description For information about the differences in waveform display data output between formats see the description of the WAVeform SEND command Example If WAVeform HOLD is set to ON after having already been set to ON before the waveform display data is cleared and the most recent waveform data is held internally When retrieving waveform display data continuously this method can be used to circumvent the
45. buffers become full at the same time the WT1800 will no longer be able to operate This condition is called a deadlock If this happens you can resume operation by discarding response messages Deadlock will not occur if the program message including the lt PMT gt is kept below 1024 bytes Program messages that do not contain queries never cause deadlocks 4 2 IM WT1801 17EN 4 2 Commands Commands There are three types of commands program headers that a controller may send to the WT1800 The commands differ in their program header formats Common Command Header Commands that are defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 are called common commands The common command header syntax is shown below Be sure to include an asterisk at the beginning of a common command SS Es ial Common command example CLS Compound Header Commands other than common commands that are specific to the WT1800 are classified and arranged in a hierarchy according to their functions The compound header syntax is shown below Be sure to use a colon to specify a lower hierarchical level lt Mnemonic gt Compound header example DISPlay MODE Simple Header These commands are functionally independent and are not contained within a hierarchy The format of a simple header is shown below i ca ae P ES Simple header example HOLD Note A lt mnemonic gt is an alphanumeric charact
46. errors will be stored to the error queue ON OFF Syntax STATus QENable lt Boolean gt STATus QENable STATUS QENABLE ON STATus QENABLE gt STATus QENABLE 1 Example spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 STATus QMESsage Function Sets or queries whether message information will be attached to the response to the STATus ERRor query ON OFF Syntax STATus QMESsage lt Boolean gt STATus QMESsage Example STATUS QMESSAGE ON STATus OMESSAGE gt STATus QMESSAGE 1 STATus SPOL1 Function Executes serial polling Syntax STATus SPOL1 Example STATUS SPOLL gt STATUS SPOLL 0 IM WT1801 17EN 5 93 5 20 STORe Group The commands in this group deal with storage You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing STORE START STORE STOP STORE RESET SHIFT STORE STOP and STORE SET SHIFT STORE START on the front panel STORe Function Queries all numeric data storage settings Syntax STORe STORe COUNt Function Sets or queries the storage count Syntax STORe COUNt lt NRf gt INFinite STORe COUNt lt NR gt 1 to 9999999 INFinite No limit Example STORE COUNT 100 STORE COUNT gt STORE COUNT 100 STORe FILE Function Queries all settings related to the saving of the data stored in the WT1800 to files Syntax STORe FILE STORe FILE ANAMing Function Sets or queries the auto naming feature for saving
47. essessesseseeeeeennnne single shot storage mode single measurement SPD Serial Poll Disable 2 cotes SPE Serial Poll Enable ort ermita Speed ssuss split screen format standard event enable register standard event register esses star to delta conversion rnnt cuyo m Index 2 IM WT1801 01EN status Dyte register sssri secet e ea eco tides eti tren status report status reports riore storage interval acies ee eet iet reed storage mode zs Cile Hip DTE MNE T Page TCP IP em 1 4 Mp E 5 45 three phase four wire 5 66 three phase three wire ssssesssessssss 5 66 three voltage three current measurement method TMCTL Torque torque 2s torque computation scaling factor suusss 5 79 torque signal input type isisisi 5 79 total harmonic distortion transition filter rtr tenerent trend display format o nte ete trend horizontal axis T div 0 00 cece eee eee teee eter eeeee 5 35 trend scallimg ss aai ret ces Eee ete trend scaling method E trend display cursor display sesssssss 5 21 trend SIM M 5 34 trigger event eren picta tr t ebd Ar fo unen necu es 5 47 trigger level eret tcp 5 37 5 53 trigger mode
48. register is 1 In other words this bit is set to 1 when the instrument requests service from the controller RQS is set to 1 when the MSS bit changes from 0 to 1 and is cleared when serial polling is carried out or when the MSS bit changes to 0 Bit Masking To mask a bit in the status byte so that it does not cause an SRQ set the corresponding bit of the service request enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 EAV so that service is not requested when an error occurs set bit 2 of the service request enable register to 0 Do this using the SRE command To query whether each bit of the service request enable register is 1 or 0 use SRE For details on the SRE command see chapter 5 Status Byte Operation A service request is issued when bit 6 in the status byte becomes 1 Bit 6 is set to 1 when any other bit becomes 1 when the corresponding bit of the service request enable register is also set to 1 For example if an event occurs and the logical AND of a standard event register bit and its corresponding enable register bit is 1 then bit 5 ESB is set to 1 At this point if bit 5 of the service request enable register is 1 bit 6 MSS is set to 1 and the WT1800 requests service from the controller You can check what type of event occurred by reading the contents of the status byte Reading the Status Byte There are two ways to read the contents of the status byt
49. 5 75 MOTor PM SCALing Sets or queries the motor output computation scaling factor 5 76 MOTor PM UNIT Sets or queries the unit that is added to the motor output computation result 5 76 MOTor POLE Sets or queries the motor s number of poles 5 76 MOTor SPEed Queries all rotating speed Speed settings 5 76 MOTor SPEed AUTO Sets or queries the voltage auto range on off status of the revolution signal 5 76 analog input type MOTor SPEed LSCale Queries all revolution signal analog input type linear scaling settings 5 76 MOTor SP Eed LSCale AVALue Sets or queries the slope A of the linear scale of the revolution signal analog 5 76 input type MOTor SP Eed LSCale BVALue Sets or queries the offset B of the linear scale of the revolution signal analog 5 76 input type MOTor SP Eed LSCale CALCulate Queries all parameter calculation settings for the linear scale of the revolution 5 76 signal analog input type MOTor SP Eed LSCale CALCulate Sets or queries the data Point1X Point1Y Point2X or Point2Y for 5 76 PIX P1Y P2X P2Y parameter calculations of the linear scale of the revolution signal analog input type MOTor SPEed LSCale CALCulate Calculates parameters for the linear scale of the revolution signal analog 5 76 EXECute input type MOTor SPEed PRANge Sets or queries the range of the revolution signal pulse input type 5 77 MOTor SP
50. 50 10 5 1 Description In the parameters list all the electric current ranges that you want to enable To enable all the ranges specify the parameter ALL Example IM WT1801 17EN 5 57 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 13 INPut Group INPut CURRent CONFig ELEMent x Function Sets or queries the valid electric current range of the specified element Syntax INPut CURRent CONFig ELEMent x ALL lt Current gt lt Current gt lt Current gt cat INPut CURRent CONFig ELEMent lt x gt x gt 1 to 6 element lt ALL All ranges are valid lt Current gt See INPut CURRent e ONFig ALL Example INPUT CURRENT CONFIG ELEMENT1 ALL NPUT CURRENT CONFIG ELEMENT1 gt NPUT CURRENT CONFIG E ENT1 ALL NPUT CURRENT CONFIG ELEMENT1 50 10 5 1 NPUT CURRENT CONFIG ELEMENT1 gt NPUT CURRENT CONFIG ELEMENT1 50 0E 00 10 0E 00 5 0E 00 1 0E 00 Description In the parameters list all the electric current ranges that you want to enable To enable all the ranges specify the parameter ALL INPut CURRent EXTSensor Function Queries all external current sensor range settings Syntax INPut CURRent EXTSensor Description This command is only valid on models with the external current sensor input EX option INPut CURRent EXTSensor CONFig Function Queries the valid external current sensor rang
51. 5V INPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR POJUMP ALL OFF Example INPut CURRent EXTSensor POJump ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the jump destination range of the specified element that is used when a current peak over range occurs Syntax INPut CURRent EXTSensor POJump ELEMent x OFF lt Voltage gt INPut CURRent EXTSensor POJump ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element OFF No jump destination current range lt Voltage gt See INPut CURRent EXTSensor POJump ALL INPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR POJUMP ELEMENT1 10V INPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR POJUMP ELEMENT1 gt INPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR POJUMP ELEMENT1 10 00E 00 Example INPut CURRent POJump Function Queries the jump destination ranges of all elements that are used when a current peak over range occurs Syntax INPut CURRent POJump INPut CURRent POJump ALL Function Collectively sets the jump destination range of all elements that is used when a current peak over range occurs Syntax INPut CURRent POJump ALL OFF lt Current gt OFF No jump destination current range 50 A input elements When the crest factor is set to 3 Current 14 2 A 5A 10A 20 A 50A When the crest factor is set to 6 Current 500 mA 1A 2 5A 5A 10A 25A 5Ainput elements When the crest factor is set to 3 Current 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA
52. DISPlay WAVE MAPPing Function Queries all split screen waveform mapping settings Syntax DISPlay WAVE MAPPing DISPlay WAVE MAPPing MODE Function Sets or queries the split screen waveform mapping mode Syntax DISPlay WAVE MAPPing MODE AUTO FIXed USER DISPlay WAVE MAPPing MODE Example DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING MODE AUTO DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING MODE gt DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING MODE AUTO DISPlay WAVE MAPPing U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt Function Sets or queries the split screen voltage current rotating speed torque or auxiliary signal waveform mapping setting Syntax DISPlay WAVE MAPPing U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue AUX x lt NRf gt DISPlay WAVE MAPPing U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt U lt x gt and I lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 6 element AUX x s x lor 2 AUX input channel lt NRf gt 0 to 5 Example DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING U1 0 DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING U1 gt DISPLAY WAVE MAPPING U1 0 Description This command is valid when the waveform mapping method DISPlay WAVE MAPPing MODE is set to USER SPEed and TORQue are only valid on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option e AUX lt x gt is only valid on models with the auxiliary input AUX option DISPlay WAVE POSition Function Queries all waveform vertical position center position level settings Syntax DISPlay WAVE POSition DIS
53. FUNCtion lt Function gt lt Element gt DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion x gt 1 to 3 item number Function U I P S Q LAMBda PHI HIU PHII Z RS XS RP XP Element 1 to 6 Example DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 U 1 DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 gt DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 U 1 A ta A A Description For information about the options available for lt Function gt see Function Option List 2 on page 5 41 DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing Function Queries all scaling settings for the specified bar graph Syntax DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing x 1 to 3 item number DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing MODE Function Sets or queries the scaling mode of the specified bar graph Syntax DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing MODE FIXed MANual DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing MODE lt x gt 1 to 3 item number Example DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 SCALING MODE FIXED DISPLAY BAR IT DISPLAY BAR IT MODE FIXED A E X SCALING MODE gt SCALING A Ira X DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing VALue Function Sets or queries the upper limit of the manual scaling of the specified bar graph Syntax DISPlay BAR ITEM x SCALing VALue lt NRf gt DISPlay BAR ITEM x SCALing VALue x 1 to 3 item number lt NRf gt 0 to 9 999E 12 DISPLAY BAR ITEMI SCALING VALUE 100 DISPLAY BAR ITEMI SCALING VALUE gt DISPLAY BAR IT VALUE 10
54. HSPeed TRIGger SLOPe Function Sets or queries the trigger slope Syntax HSPeed TRIGger SLOPe RISE FALL BOTH HSPeed TRIGger SLOPe Example HSPEED TRIGGER SLOPE RISE HSPEED TRIGGER SLOPE HSPEED TRIGGER SLOPE RISE Description This command performs the same setting as the DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SLOPe command HSPeed TRIGger SOURce Function Sets or queries the trigger source Syntax HSPeed TRIGger SOURce U lt x gt I lt x gt EXTernal HSPeed TRIGger SOURce x 1 to 6 element EXTernal External trigger input Ext Clk Example HSPEED TRIGGER SOURCE U1 HSPEED TRIGGER SOURCE gt HSPEED TRIGGER SOURCE U1 Description This command performs the same setting as the DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SOURce command 5 54 IM WT1801 17EN 5 12 IMAGe Group The commands in this group deal with saving screen image data You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by pressing IMAGE SAVE and MENU SHIFT IMAGE SAVE on the front panel IMAGe Function Queries all screen image data output settings Syntax IMAGe IMAGe ABORt Function Aborts a screen image data output operation Syntax IMAGe ABORt Example IMAGE ABORT IMAGe COLor Function Sets or queries the color tone of the screen image data that will be saved Syntax IMAGe COLor OFF COLor REVerse GRAY IMAGe COLor Example IMAGE COLOR
55. ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt STORe NUMeric NORMal Function lt Boolean gt lt Function gt Function Name Used on the Menu lt Element gt lt Order gt Numeric display header name URMS Urms Required Not required UMN Umn Required Not required UDC Udc Required Not required URMN Urmn Required Not required UAC Uac Required Not required IRMS Irms Required Not required IMN Imn Required Not required IDC Idc Required Not required IRMN Irmn Required Not required IAC lac Required Not required P P Required Not required S S Required Not required Q Q Required Not required LAMBda Required Not required PHI 9 Required Not required FU FreqU fU Required Not required FI Freql fl Required Not required UPPeak U peak U pk Required Not required UMPeak U peak U pk Required Not required IPPeak I peak I pk Required Not required IMPeak I peak I pk Required Not required CFU CfU Required Not required CFI Cfl Required Not required PC Pc Required Not required PPPeak P peak P pk Required Not required PMPeak P peak P pk Required Not required TIME Time Required Not required WH WP Required Not required WHP WP Required Not required WHM WP Required Not required AH q Required Not required AHP qt Required Not required AHM q Required Not required WS WS Required Not required WQ WQ R
56. MA is interpreted as milliampere for current In addition megahertz is expressed as MHZ Therefore M Milli cannot be used for frequencies If both lt Multiplier gt and Unit are omitted the basic unit V A S or HZ is used Response messages are always expressed in the lt NR3 gt form Additionally they are returned using the basic units without a multiplier or unit attached 4 6 IM WT1801 17EN 4 4 Data lt Register gt lt Register gt is an integer that can be expressed in decimal hexadecimal octal or binary notation It is used when each bit of the value has a particular meaning The following types of expressions are possible Form Example lt NRf gt 1 H lt Hexadecimal value made up of HOF the digits 0 to 9 and A to F gt Q lt Octal value made up of the digits 0 to 7 gt Q777 B lt Binary value made up of the digits 0 and 1 gt B001100 Register is not case sensitive Response messages are always expressed in the lt NR1 gt form lt Character Data gt lt Character data gt is a predefined character string a mnemonic It is mainly used to indicate that an option listed as a character string in braces must be selected and entered The data interpretation rules are the same as those described in Header Interpretation Rules on page 4 4 Form Example AUTO NORMa 1 AUTO As with the header the COMMunicate VERBose comm
57. NUMeric CUSTom ITEM lt x gt COLor Function Sets or queries the font color of the specified display item of the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM x COLor YELLow GREen MAGenta CYAN RED ORANge LBLue PURPle BLUE PINK LGReen DBLue BGReen SPINk MGReen GRAY WHITE DGRAY BGRAY BLACk DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM x COLor x 1 to 192 item number YELLow Yellow GREen Green MAGenta Magenta CYAN Cyan RED Red ORANge Orange LBLue Light blue URPle Purple LUE Blue INK Pink tu W W LGReen Light green DBLue Dark blue BGReen Blue green SPINk Salmon pink MGReen Mild green GRAY Gray WHITE White DGRAY Dark gray B B Q z Blue gray LACk Black Example DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM1 COLOR WHITE DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM1 COLOR gt DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM1 COLOR WHITE DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM x FUNCtion Function Sets or queries the display item numeric item or string of the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt lt String gt DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM x FUNCtion x 1 to 192 item number When setting a numeric item Function URMS IRMS P SI Ql Element NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC NR
58. PA PB PC PZA PZB P C the available options vary depending on the number of elements PM Pm motor output only on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option MEASURE EFFICIENCY UDEF1 P1 P2 P3 MEASURE EFFICIENCY UDEF1 gt MEASURE EFFICIENCY UDEF1 P1 P2 P3 Description Set the parameters in ascending order Parameters 2 to 4 can be omitted Omitted parameters are set to NONE Parameters 2 to 4 are omitted from the response to a query if all the subsequent parameters are NONE Example MEASure EVENt x Function Queries all the settings of the specified user defined event Syntax MEASure EVENt x x 1 to 8 Eventl to Event8 MEASure EVENt x EXPRession Function Queries all the settings of the specified user defined event s expression Syntax MEASure EVENt x EXPRession x 1 to 8 Eventl to Event8 MEASure EVENt x EXPRession CONDition Function Sets or queries the specified user defined event s expression compound condition type Syntax MEASure EVENt x EXPRession CONDition lt Event gt lt Logic gt lt Event gt lt Logic gt lt Event gt MEASure EVENt x EXPRession CONDition Kx to 8 Eventl to Event8 Event NRf NRf 1 to 8 Eventl to Event8 Logic AND OR MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION CONDITION 1 AND 2 MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION CONDITION gt MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION
59. READy The file is closed data capturing is in standby or the data has been captured and saved to the file RECord The file is open data is being captured STOP The file is closed data is being captured but the file save operation has been stopped because an error occurred CONVert 7 Stored data is being converted to CSV format OFF The WT1800 is not configured to save captured data to files or the WT1800 is not in high speed data capturing mode HSPeed RECord ITEM Function Queries all settings for the numeric data items that will be saved to a file Syntax HSPeed RECord ITEM HSPeed RECord ITEM AUX lt x gt Function Sets or queries whether numeric data auxiliary input is saved to a file Syntax HSPeed RECord ITEM AUX x lt Boolean gt HSPeed RECord ITEM AUX lt x gt x 1 or 2 AUX input channel Example HSPEED RECORD ITEM AUX1 ON HSPEED RECORD ITEM AUX1 gt HSPEED RECORD ITEM AUX1 1 Description This is only valid on models with the auxiliary input AUX option HSPeed RECord ITEM I lt x gt IA IB IC Function Sets or queries whether the specified element or wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C of the numeric data current will be saved Syntax HSPeed RECord ITEM IC lt Boolean gt HSPeed RECord ITEM x 1 to 6 element IA IB IC IZA IZB IZC Xx IA IB Xx IA IB IC Example HS
60. V3A3 P1W2 P1W3 P3W3 P3W4 V3A3 P1W2 P1W3 P333 P1W2 INPut WIRing P1W2 Single phase two wire system 1P2W P1W3 Single phase three wire system 1P3W P3W3 Three phase three wire System 3P3W P3W4 Three phase four wire system 3P3W V3A3 Three phase three wire System with a three voltage three current method 3P3W 3V3A Example for a 6 element model NPUT WIRING P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 NPUT WIRING gt INPUT WIRING P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 P1W2 NPUT WIRING P1W3 P1W3 P1W3 NPUT WIRING NPUT WIRING P1W3 P1W3 P1W3 NPUT WIRING P3W4 V3A3 NPUT WIRING NPUT WIRING P3W4 V3A3 Example for a 3 element model NPUT WIRING P1W2 P3W3 NPUT WIRING gt INPUT WIRING P1W2 P3W3 NPUT WIRING P3W4 NPUT WIRING gt INPUT WIRING P3WA Description Set the wiring system pattern in order starting from the element with the smallest number Some wiring system patterns cannot be selected on certain model types For details on the available wiring system patterns see the features guide IM WT1801 01EN The pattern is fixed to P1W2 on 1 element models No other setting is allowed 5 66 IM WT1801 17EN 5 14 INTEGrate Group The commands in this group deal with integration You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing INTEG on the front panel INTEGrate Function Queries all integration
61. a ae es ee tC yp m current mode for current integration sussssse 5 67 IM WT1801 01EN Index 1 Index l Page IEC Interface Cleat oiiire 3 7 imagedata SaViMgi osre a E a EENDE 5 55 image data color tone 5 55 independent element integration 5 67 independent input element configuration a initialization rr tee eee input element type 2 etre et Ced input filter oie integrated value resetting integration S integration starfirig 2 reris integration Stopping iere tte et ee epe integration synchronized print mode iit integration synchronized storage mode 5 96 integration auto calibration sssusa 5 67 diste MIO Turo m 5 67 Integration firme onde dca eee integration timer P interval printumode crier a neces emergere tents 5 46 J Page jump destination trange eniin aesan ia 5 58 5 65 K Page KEV OC menre E E E E EE EE 5 98 L Page line fiter ciata aa 5 50 5 61 5 75 LLO Local Lockout ssssseeeneeeeenees 3 7 local loCKOUL cocoa mto Aa ES 5 19 M Page mariual storage mode er eee te eee 5 96 MAX HOLD m maximum analyzed harmonic order ssssse 5 45 menu language sessesseseseeeeneeeneee enne 5 98 MESSAGE vsisi L 4 1 minimum analyzed harmonic order 5 45 model ER tnt 5 102 model code
62. and time 5 97 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime Sets or queries the time difference from Greenwich Mean Time 5 97 SYSTem CLOCk TYPE Sets or queries the date time setup method 5 97 SYSTem DATE Sets or queries the date 5 97 SYSTem DFLow FREQuency Sets or queries the frequency data display format when a low frequency or 5 97 no frequency input is applied SYSTem DFLow MOTor Sets or queries the motor data display format when no pulse is applied 5 97 SYSTem DPOint Sets or queries the type of decimal point that is used when saving various 5 97 data in ASCII format CSV SYSTem ECLear Clears error messages displayed on the screen 5 97 SYSTem FONT Sets or queries the menu and message font size 5 98 SYSTem KLOCk Sets or queries the on off status of the key lock 5 98 SYSTem LANGuage Queries all display language settings 5 98 SYSTem LANGuage MENU Sets or queries the menu language 5 98 SYSTem LANGuage MESSage Sets or queries the message language 5 98 SYSTem LCD Queries all LCD settings 5 98 SYSTem LCD AOFF Queries all the settings for the feature that automatically turns off the 5 98 backlight SYSTem LCD AOFF STATe Sets or queries the on off status of the feature that automatically turns off the 5 98 backlight SYSTem LCD AOFF TIME Sets or queries the amount of time until the backlight is automatically turned 5 98 off SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness Sets or queries the LCD brightness 5 98 SYSTem LCD COLor Quer
63. are captured in a single data update interval are output in order A single data record contains the numeric data items from number 1 to the specified value By default the number of numeric data items is set to 3 Example IM WT1801 17EN 5 81 5 17 NUMeric Group NUMeric HSPeed PRESet Function Syntax Example Presets the numeric data output item pattern of the high speed data capturing mode NUMeric HSPeed PRESet DEFault RECord DEFault default RECord same settings as the file output NUMERIC HSPEED PRESET DEFAULT Description This command is only valid on models with thehigh speed data capturing HS option For the default see 3 Preset Patterns for High Speed Data Capturing Mode Numeric Data Output Items at the end of this group of commands page 5 91 NUMeric HSPeed VALue Function Queries the numeric data of high speed data capturing mode Syntax NUMeric HSPeed VALue lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 30 item number Example When there are 100 data records captured in a single data update interval e When lt NRf gt is specified NUMERIC HSPEED VALUE 1 gt 103 79E 00 103 26E 00 omitted 103 53E 00 UL LJ UL 21 omitted s U1 100 100 data entries e When NRf is omitted when NUMeric HSPeed NUMber is set to 3 NUMERIC HSPEED VALUE gt 103 79E 00 1 0143E 00 105 27E 00 103 26E 00 1 0185E 00 105 17E 00 omitted 10
64. dee Z2 Z2 F A Z5 al A A al A Q EA 3600 svi soca aux vm T000V ur cUpRENT cugnent CURRENT ccupnen A A A sw xc xc 4 WA nul A SNA m h Amb Bern O ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS E9 iooov max To J ED 000v max ro f E 100v max To jA E 100v max To JA EU 10007 max ro f too0v max ro Z2 Ethernet port This port is for connecting the WT1800 to a controller such as a PC using an Ethernet cable For details on how to connect the WT1800 to a controller see page 1 4 IM WT1801 17EN 92ej19jU JOUIOUIA Ethernet Interface Features and Specifications Ethernet Interface Features Reception Feature You can use the reception feature to specify the same settings that you can specify by using the front panel keys The WT1800 can receive output requests for measured and computed data panel setup parameters and error codes Transmission Feature The WT1800 can transmit measured and computed data The WT1800 can transmit panel setup parameters and the status byte The WT1800 can transmit error codes when errors occur Ethernet Interface Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications complies with IEEE802 3 Simultaneous connections 1 Communication protocol TCP IP VXI 11
65. display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE LOAD ABORt Example DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE LOAD ABORT DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE LOAD BMP Function Loads the specified background file for the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE LOAD BMP lt String gt lt String gt File name DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE LOAD BMP CUSTOM1 Description Specify the file name without its extension bmp This command is an overlap command Example DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE LOAD BOTH Function Loads the specified display configuration and background files for the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE LOAD BOTH lt String gt lt String gt File name DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE LOAD BOTH CUSTOM1 Description Specify the file name without an extension This command is an overlap command Example DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE LOAD ITEM Function Loads the specified display configuration file for the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE LOAD ITEM lt String gt lt String gt File name DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE LOAD ITEM CUSTOM1 Description Specify the file name without its extension txt Example This command is an overlap command DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE PATH Function Queries the absolute p
66. distortion factor values UTHD ITHD and PTHD If the values exceed 100 96 the mantissa will have six digits IM WT1801 17EN 5 87 spuewwoy uoneoiunuliulo2 5 17 NUMeric Group Preset Patterns for Numeric Data Items The Function Option List in the DISPlay Group section contains a list of the function names used in commands where the command syntax contains lt Function gt and the function names in the WT1800 display menus that correspond to them Note This list indicates the measurement function and element that are assigned to each item number ITEM lt x gt Items that are not set to be measured are displayed or output in the same fashion as when the data does not exist For example if frequency FI of the current of element 2 is not set to be measured the output of ITEM19 in pattern 1 is the same as the output when the data does not exist NAN if the data format is ASCII 1 Preset Patterns for Numeric Data Items These patterns apply to the NUMeric NORMal PRESet command Pattern 1 ITEM lt x gt lt Function gt lt Element gt 1 URMS 1 2 IRMS 1 3 P 1 4 S 1 5 Q 1 6 LAMBda 1 7 PHI 1 8 FU 1 9 FI 1 10 NONE 11 to 19 URMS to FI 2 20 NONE 21 to 29 URMS to FI 3 30 NONE 31 to 39 URMS to FI 4 40 NONE 41 to 49 URMS to FI 5 50 NONE 51 to 59 URMS to FI 6 60 NONE 61 to 69 URMS to FI SIGMA 70 NONE 71 to 79 URMS to FI SIGMB 80 NONE 81 to 89 URMS to FI SIGMC 90 NONE 91 to 255 NONE Pattern 2 ITEM lt x gt lt F
67. filter HS Filter Syntax HSPeed FILTer HS OFF lt Frequency gt HSPeed FILTer HS OFF Digital filter off lt Frequency gt 1 Hz to 1000 Hz when the digital filter is on cutoff f requency Example HSPEED FILTER HS 100HZ HSPEED FILTER HS gt HSPEED FILTER HS 100 0E 00 HSPeed FILTer LINE Function Queries all high speed data capturing line filter settings Syntax HSPeed FILTer LINE HSPeed FILTer LINE ALL Function Sets the line filters of all the high speed data capturing elements Syntax HSPeed FILTer LINE ALL lt Frequency gt lt Frequency gt 0 1 kHz to 100 0 kHz 300 kHz cutoff frequency Example HSPEED FILTER LINE ALL 300KHZ Description Line filters are always on in high speed data capturing mode This command sets the cutoff frequency You can set the frequency between 0 1 kHz and 100 0 kHz with a resolution of 0 1 KHz HSPeed FILTer LINE ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the line filter of the specified high speed data capturing element Syntax HSPeed FILTer LINE tz LEMent lt x gt lt Frequency gt HSPeed FILTer LINE ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element kHz to 100 0 kHz 300 kHz cutoff frequency HSPEED FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 300KHZ HSPEED FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 gt HSPEED FILTER LINE LEMENT1 300 000E 03 Description Line filters are always on in high speed data capturing mode This comman
68. gt I lt x gt EXTernal HARMonics lt x gt PLLSource HARMonics lt x gt s lt x gt 1 or 2 harmonic measurement group U lt x gt and I lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 6 element EXTernal External clock input Ext Clk HARMONICS PLLSOURCE U1 HARMONICS PLLSOURCE gt HARMONICS1 PLLSOURCE U1 HARMonics lt x gt THD Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the equation used to compute the THD total harmonic distortion HARMonics lt x gt THD TOTal FUNDamental HARMonics lt x gt THD lt x gt 1 or 2 harmonic measurement group HARMONICS THD TOTAL HARMONICS THD gt HARMONICS1 THD TOTAL IM WT1801 17EN 5 45 5 9 HCOPy Group The commands in this group deal with printing on the built in printer You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing PRINT and MENU SHIFT PRINT on the front panel The commands in this group are only valid on models with the built in printer B5 option HCOPy HCOPy AUTO MODE Function Queries all print settings Function Sets or queries the auto print operation mode Syntax HCOPy Syntax HCOPy AUTO MODE INTerval RTIMe INTEGrate EVENt HCOPy ABORt HCOPy AUTO MODE Function Aborts a print operation INTerval Interval print mode Syntax HCOPy ABORt RTIMe Real time print mode Example HCOPY ABORT INTEGrate Integration synchronized print mode HCOPy AUTO EVENt Event sy
69. integration 5 68 mode NTEGrate STARt Starts integration 5 68 NTEGrate STATe Queries the integration status 5 68 NTEGrate STOP Stops integration 5 69 NTEGrate TIMer lt x gt Sets or queries the integration timer value 5 69 NTEGrate TMAL1 Collectively sets the integration timer of all elements 5 69 NTEGrate WPTYpe Queries the watt hour integration methods for each polarity WP WP of all 5 69 elements NTEGrate WPTYpe ALL Collectively sets the watt hour integration method for each polarity WP WP 5 69 of all elements NTEGrate WPTYpe ELEMent x Sets or queries the watt hour integration method for each polarity WP WP 5 69 of the specified element MEASure Group MEASure Queries all computation settings 5 70 MEASure AVERaging Queries all averaging settings 5 70 MEASure AVERaging COUNt Sets or queries the averaging coefficient 5 70 MEASure AVERaging STATe Sets or queries the on off status of averaging 5 70 MEASure AVERaging TYPE Sets or queries the averaging type 5 70 MEASure DMeasure Queries all delta computation settings 5 70 MEASure DMeasure MODE Sets or queries the voltage or current mode that is used in delta computation 5 70 MEASure DMeasure Sets or queries the delta computation mode for wiring unit 2A 2B or 2C 5 70 SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC MEASure EFFiciency Queries all efficiency computation settings 5
70. is no response Only lt RMT gt is returned In FLOAT format the response is 10 only the header that indicates there are no data bytes is returned NUMeric HOLD Function Sets or queries the on off hold release status of the numeric data hold feature Syntax NUMeric HOLD lt Boolean gt NUMeric HOLD NUMERIC HOLD ON NUMERIC HOLD gt NUMERIC HOLD 1 Description If NUMeric HOLD is set to ON before NUMeric NORMal VALue or NUMeric LIST VALue is executed all the numeric data at that point in time can be held internally As long as NUMeric HOLD is set to ON numeric data is held even when the numeric data on the screen is updated For example if you wish to retrieve various Example types of numeric data from each element at the same point in time use the following commands NUMeric HOLD ON NUMeric NORMal ITEM1 URMS 1 ITEM2 IRMS 1 Set the numeric data items of element 1 NUMeric NORMal VALue Receive the numeric data of element 1 NUMeric NORMal ITEM1 URMS 2 ITEM2 IRMS 2 Set the numeric data items of element 2 NUMeric NORMal VALue Receive the numeric data of element 2 NUMeric NORMal ITEM1 URMS 3 ITEM2 IRMS 3 Set the numeric data items of element 3 NUMeric NORMal VALue Receive the numeric data of element 3 NUMeric HOLD OFF f NUMeric HOLD is set to ON after having already been set to ON before the numeric
71. length 226 Out Of Memory Keep program messages including lt PMT gt to 1024 4 2 bytes or less in length 241 Hardware missing Check that the specified options are all installed 260 Expression error Equations cannot be used 270 Macro error The WT1800 does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 272 Macro execution error The WT1800 does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 273 Illegal macro label The WT1800 does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 275 Macro definition too long The WT1800 does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 276 Macro recursion error The WT1800 does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 277 Macro redefinition not allowed The WT1800 does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 278 Macro header not found The WT1800 does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications App 2 IM WT1801 17EN Appendix 1 Error Messages Communication Query Errors 400 to 499 Code Message Corrective Action Page 410 Query INTERRUPTED Check the transmission and reception order 4 2 420 Query UNTERMINATED Check the transmission and reception order 4 2 430 Query DEADLOCKED Keep program messages including lt PMT gt to 1024 4 2 bytes or less in length 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response Do not write a query after IDN or OPT System Communication Errors 300 an
72. lt NRf gt 0 to 800 CURSOR WAVE POSITION1 160 CURSOR WAVE POSITION1 gt CURSOR WAVE POSITION1 160 Example CURSor WAVE STATe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the cursor display on the waveform display Syntax CURSor WAVE STATe Boolean CURSor WAVE STATe CURSOR WAVE STATE ON CURSOR WAVE STATE CURSOR WAVE STATE 1 Example CURSor WAVE TRACe lt x gt Function Sets or queries the target of the specified cursor on the waveform display Syntax CURSor WAVE TRACe lt x gt U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt CURSor WAVE TRACe lt x gt TRACe lt x gt s x 1 2 1 C1 2 C2 x U lt x gt and I lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 6 element AUX lt x gt s lt x gt 1 or 2 AUX input channel CURSOR WAVE TRACE1 U1 CURSOR WAVE TRACE1 gt CURSOR WAVE TRACE1 U1 Description SPEed and TORQue can only be selected on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option e AUX lt x gt can only be selected on models with the auxiliary input AUX option Example CURSor WAVE X lt x gt DX PERDt Y lt x gt DY Function Queries the measured value of the specified cursor on the waveform display Syntax CURSor WAVE X x DX PERDt Y lt x gt DY X lt x gt X axis value of the cursor position X1 X X2 Xx DX X axis difference DX between the cursors PERDt Value of 1 DT 1 DX between th
73. off status of independent input element configuration 5 62 5 8 IM WT1801 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page INPut MODU1e Queries the input element type 5 62 INPut NULL CONDition Queries the status of the NULL operation of rotating speed torque or AUX 5 62 SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt INPut NULL Queries the status of the voltage or current NULL operation of the specified 5 62 CONDition U lt x gt I lt x gt element INPut NULL STATe Sets or queries the on off status of the NULL feature 5 62 INPut NULL TARGet Queries all settings for the target of the NULL feature 5 62 INPut NULL TARGet MODE Sets or queries the selection mode for the target of the NULL feature 5 62 INPut NULL TARGet Sets or queries the target of the NULL operation rotating speed torque or 5 62 SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt AUX INPut NULL Sets or queries the target of the voltage or current NULL operation of the 5 63 TARGet U lt x gt I lt x gt specified element INPut NULL Collectively sets the target of the voltage or current NULL operation of all 5 63 TARGet UALL IALL elements INPut POVer Queries the peak over range information 5 63 INPut SCALing Queries all scaling settings 5 63 INPut S
74. register value gt STATUS EESE HFE lt Character data gt Predefined character string mnemonic Select from the available strings in braces Example Trigger mode selection gt DISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE AUTO NORMal OFF lt Boolean gt Indicates on and off Specify ON OFF ora value Ifa value outside the range is entered the value is adjusted to the closest value within the range Ifa value has more significant digits than are available the value will be rounded lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt Time gt and lt Frequency gt lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt Time gt and lt Frequency gt indicate decimal values that have physical significance A lt Multiplier gt or lt Unit gt can be attached to the lt NRf gt form that was described earlier The following types of expressions are possible Form Example lt NRf gt lt Multiplier gt lt Unit gt SMV lt NRf gt lt Unit gt 5E 3V lt NRf gt lt Multiplier gt 5M lt NRf gt 5E 3 lt Multiplier gt lt Multipliers gt that you can use are indicated in the following table Example Turning data hold on HOLD ON lt String data gt User defined string Example User defined function MEASure FUNCtionl EXPRession URMS E1 Filename Indicates a file name Example Save file name FILE SAVE SETup EXECute CASE1 Block data Data that contains 8 bit values Example
75. required Not required IM WT1801 17EN 5 39 spuewwoy uoneoiunululo2 5 6 DISPlay Group DU1 AU1 DU2 AU2 DU3 AU3 DUS AUX DI AI DP1 AP1 DP2 AP2 DP3 AP3 DPS AP SPEed Speed TORQue Torque SYNCsp SyncSp SLIP Slip PM Pm EAU EaU EAI Eal AUX1 Aux1 AUX2 Aux2 Note Functions That Require the Delta Computation DT Option Required only 2 Required only 2 Required only 2 Required only 2 Required only 2 Required only 2 Required only 2 Required only 2 Required only 2 Functions That Require the Motor Evaluation Function MTR Option Functions That Require the Auxiliary Input AUX Option Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Required Required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required For functions in the list above that do not require the element to be specified but whose commands have a parameter for specifying the element Element omit the parameter or set it to 1 Likewise for functions in the list above that do not require the harmonic order to be specified but whose commands have a parameter for specifying the harmonic order Order omit the parameter or set it to TOTal 5 40 IM WT1801 17EN 5 6 DIS
76. see the features guide IM WT1801 01EN STORe RESet Function Resets the numeric data storage feature Syntax STORe RESet Example STORE RESET STORe RTIMe Function Queries the storage start and end times for real time storage mode Syntax STORe RTIMe STORe RTIMe STARt END Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the storage start or end time for real time storage mode STORe RTIMe STARt END lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt lt NR gt STORe RTIMe STARt END lt NR gt lt NR gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt lt NR gt 2001 1 1 0 0 0 to 2099 I2 301 225 59 59 lt NRf gt First lt NRf gt 2001 to 2099 year Second lt NRf gt 1 to 12 month Third NRf 1 to 31 day Fourth NRf 0 to 23 hour Fifth NRf 0 to 59 minute Sixth NRf 0 to 59 second STORE RTIME START 2011 1 1 0 0 0 STORE RTIME START gt STORE RTIME START 2011 1 1 0 0 0 Description This command is valid when the storage mode STORe SMODe is set to RTIMe STORe SASTart Function Sets or queries whether numeric data is stored when storage starts Syntax STORe SASTart Boolean STORe SASTart Example STORE SASTART OFF STORE SASTART gt STORE SASTART 0 Description This command is valid when the storage mode STORe SMODe is set to MANual RTIMe or INTEGrate and when the storage interval is a va
77. standard event enable register bits to ones and zeros You can use the E SE command to query whether the standard event enable register bits are ones or zeros For details on these commands see chapter 5 IM WT1801 17EN 6 2 Status Byte Status Byte RQS 7 6 ESBMAVIEESEAV 1 0 MSS e Bits 0 1 and 7 Not used always 0 Bit 2 EAV Error Available This bit is set to 1 when the error queue is not empty In other words this bit is set to 1 when an error occurs For details see page 6 6 Bit 3 EES Extend Event Summary Bit This bit is set to 1 when the logical AND of the extended event register and the extended event enable register is 1 In other words this bit is set to 1 when a certain event takes place inside the instrument For details see page 6 5 Bit 4 MAV Message Available This bit is set to 1 when the output queue is not empty In other words this bit is set to 1 when there is data to be transmitted in response to a query For details see page 6 6 e Bit 5 ESB Event Summary Bit This bit is set to 1 when the logical AND of the standard event register and the standard event enable register is 1 In other words this bit is set to 1 when a certain event takes place inside the instrument For details see page 6 4 Bit 6 RQS Request Service MSS Master Status Summary This bit is set to 1 when the logical AND of the status byte excluding bit 6 and the service request enable
78. the file name without an extension FILE DELete NUMeric ASCii Function Deletes the specified numeric data file Syntax FILE DELete NUMeric ASCii String String File name Example FILE DELETE NUMERIC ASCII NUML Description Specify the file name without an extension FILE DELete SETup Function Deletes the specified setup parameter file Syntax FILE DELete SETup lt String gt lt String gt File name Example FILE DELETE SETUP SETUP1 Description Specify the file name without an extension FILE DELete STORe DATA HEADer Function Deletes the specified stored numeric data file Syntax FILE DELete STORe DATA HEADer lt String gt lt String gt File name Example FILE DELETE STORE DATA STRI Description Specify the file name without an extension FILE DELete WAVE ASCii Function Deletes the specified waveform display data file Syntax FILE DELete WAVE ASCii lt String gt lt String gt File name Example FILE DELETE WAVE ASCII WAVE1 Description Specify the file name without an extension FILE DRIVe Function Sets the current drive Syntax FILE DRIVe RAM USB lt NRf gt NETWork RAM Built in RAM drive USB USB memory device drive lt NRf gt 0 or 1 drive number NETWork Network drive Example FILE DRIVE RAM FILE FILTer Function Sets or queries the file list filter Syntax FILE FILTer ALL ITEM FILE FILTer Example FILE FIL
79. the header that it receives according to the rules below Mnemonics are not case sensitive Example CURSor can be written as cursor or Cursor The lower case characters can be omitted Example CURSor can be written as CURSO or CURS e The question mark at the end of a header indicates that it is a query You cannot omit the question mark Example The shortest abbreviation for CURSor js CURS If the x value at the end of a mnemonic is omitted it is interpreted as a 1 Example If ELEMent lt x gt is written as ELEM it means ELEMent1 Parts of commands and parameters enclosed in square brackets can be omitted Example INPut SCALing STATe ALL ON can be written as SCAL ON However the last section enclosed in square brackets cannot be omitted in an upper level query Example SCALing and SCALing STATe are different queries 4 4 IM WT1801 17EN 4 3 Responses Responses When the controller sends a query a command with a question mark the WT1800 returns a response message to the query The WT1800 returns response messages in one of the following two forms Response Consisting of a Header and Data Responses that can be used as program messages without any changes are returned with command headers attached Example DISPlay MODE lt PMT gt gt DISPLAY MODE WAVE lt RMT gt Response Consisting On
80. to 160 161 to 180 181 to 255 2 Preset Patterns for Harmonic Measurement Numeric List Data Output Items These patterns apply to the NUMeric LIST PRESet command Pattern 1 ITEM lt x gt 1 2 3 4to6 7to9 10 to 12 13 to 15 16 to 18 19 to 64 Pattern 2 ITEM lt x gt 1 2 3 4 5 6to 10 11 to 15 16 to 20 21 to 25 26 to 30 31 to 64 Q FU Fl TIME WH WHP WHM AH AHP AHM URMS to AHM URMS to AHM URMS to AHM URMS to AHM URMS to AHM URMS to AHM URMS to AHM URMS to AHM NONE lt Function gt U l P U to P Uto P Uto P Uto P Uto P NONE Function U P PHIU PHII U to PHII U to PHII U to PHII U to PHII U to PHII NONE O1 E QN a 2n 222222 SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Element ro EU lt Element gt O O k ON Baa a a 5 90 IM WT1801 17EN 5 17 NUMeric Group Pattern 3 ITEM lt x gt lt Function gt lt Element gt 1 U 1 2 l 1 3 P 1 4 S 1 5 Q 1 6 LAMBda 1 7 PHI 1 8 PHIU 1 9 PHII 1 10 to 18 U to PHII 2 19 to 27 U to PHII 3 28 to 36 U to PHII 4 37 to 45 U to PHII 5 46 to 54 U to PHII 6 55 to 64 NONE Pattern 4 ITEM lt x gt lt Function gt lt Element gt il U 1 2 1 3 P 1 4 Q 1 5 Z 1 6 RS 1 7 XS 1 8 RP 1 9 XP 1 10 to 18 U to XP 2 19 to 27 U to XP 3 28 to 36 U to XP 4 37 to 45 U to XP 5 46 to 54 U to XP 6 55 to 64 NONE 3 Preset Patterns for High Speed Data Capturing Mode Numeric Data Output Items These patterns apply
81. to 8 characters MEASURE EVENT1 NAME Ev1 MEASURE EVENT1 NAME gt MEASURE EVENT1 NAME Evil Example MEASure EVENt lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the specified user defined event Syntax MEASure EVENt x STATe lt Boolean gt MEASure EVENt x STATe x 1 to 8 Eventl to Event8 MEASURE EVENT1 STATE ON MEASURE EVENT1 STATE gt MEASURE EVENT1 STATE 1 Example 5 72 IM WT1801 17EN 5 15 MEASure Group MEASure EVENt lt x gt TLABel Function Sets or queries the string that is displayed when the specified user defined event s condition is met Syntax MEASure EVENt lt x gt TLABel String MEASure EVENt x TLABel x 1 to 8 Eventl to Event8 String Up to 6 characters Example MEASURE EVENT1 TLABEL True MEASURE EVENT1 TLABEL gt MEASURE EVENT1 TLABEL True MEASure FREQuency Function Queries all frequency measurement settings Syntax MEASure FREQuency Description On models with the add on frequency measurement FQ option all input elements can be measured simultaneously so it is not necessary to use this query MEASure FREQuency ITEM lt x gt Function Sets or queries the element whose frequency will be measured Syntax MEASure FREQuency ITEM x U lt x gt I lt x gt MEASure FREQuency ITEM lt x gt ITEM lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 3 Freq 1 to Freq 3 U lt x gt and I l
82. 0 0E 00 Example M1 SCALING E Description This command is valid when the scaling mode of the bar graph DISPlay BAR ITEM x SCALing MODE is set to MANual This command only sets the upper limit The lower limit is determined automatically as shown below according to the vertical scaling mode DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing VERTical 1 When the mode is LINear 0 when the X axis position DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing XAXis is BOTTom the negative value of the upper limit when the X axis position is CENTer 2 When the mode is LOG The upper limit 10000 IM WT1801 17EN 5 23 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing VERTical Function Sets or queries the vertical scaling mode of the specified bar graph Syntax DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing VERTical LINear LOG DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing VERTical lt x gt 1 to 3 item number Example DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 SCALING VERTICAL LOG DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 SCALING VERTICAL gt DISPLAY BAR ITEM1 SCALING VERTICAL LOG Description This command is valid when the scaling mode of the bar graph DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing MODE is set to MANual DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt SCALing XAXis Function Sets or queries the position of the X axis of the specified bar graph
83. 00 V When the crest factor is set to 6 Voltage 0 75 V 1 5 V 3 V 5 V 7 5 V 15 V 30 V 50 V 75 V 150 V 300 V 500 V INPUT VOLTAGE CONFIG ALL ALL INPUT VOLTAGE CONFIG ALL 1000 300 100 30 10 In the parameters list all the voltage ranges that you want to enable To enable all the ranges specify the parameter ALL INPut VOLTage CONFig ELEMent lt x gt Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries the valid voltage ranges of the specified element INPut VOLTage CONFig ELEMent lt x gt ALL lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt INPut VOLTage CONFig ELEMent x x 1 to 6 element ALL All ranges are valid Voltage See INPut VOLTage CONFig ALL NPUT VOLTAGE CONFIG ELEMENT1 ALL INPUT VOLTAGE CONFIG ELEMENT1 gt INPUT VOLTAGE CONFIG ELEMENT1 ALL INPUT VOLTAGE CONFIG ELEMENT 1000 300 100 30 10 INPUT VOLTAGE CONFIG ELEMENT1 gt INPUT VOLTAGE CONFIG ELEMENT 1 0000E 03 300 0E 00 100 0E 00 30 0E 00 10 0E 00 In the parameters list all the voltage ranges that you want to enable To enable all the ranges specify the parameter ALL INPut VOLTage POJump Function Syntax Queries the jump destination ranges of all elements that are used when a voltage peak over range occurs INPut VOLTage POJump INPut VOLTage POJump ALL Function
84. 1 1 1 0 0 0 to 2099 12 31 23 59 59 First lt NRf gt 2001 to 2099 year Second lt NRf gt 1 to 12 month Third lt NRf gt 1 to 31 day Fourth NRf 0 to 23 hour Fifth NRf 0 to 59 minute Sixth lt NRf gt 0 to 59 second Example INTEGRATE RTALL START 2010 1 1 0 0 0 IM WT1801 17EN 5 67 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 14 INTEGrate Group INTEGrate RTIMe lt x gt Function Queries the integration start and end times for real time integration mode INTEGrate RTIMe lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element Syntax INTEGrate RTIMe lt x gt STARt END Function Sets or queries the integration start or end time for real time integration mode INTEGrate RTIMe lt x gt STARt END NRf NRf NRf NRf NRf Syntax lt NRf gt INTEGrate RTIMe lt x gt STARt END lt x gt 1 to 6 element lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt lt NR gt 2001 1 1 0 0 0 to 2099 12 31 23 00 00 First lt NRf gt 2001 to 2099 year Second lt NRf gt 1 to 12 month Third lt NRf gt 1 to 31 day Fourth lt NRf gt 0 to 23 hour Fifth NRf 0 to 59 minute Sixth NRf 0 to 59 second INTEGRATE RTIME1 START 2010 1 1 0 0 0 INTEGRATE RTIME1 START gt INTEGRATE RTIME1 START 2010 1 1 0 0 0 Description This command is valid when the integration mode INTEGrate MODE is set to real time Exampl
85. 200 mA 500 mA 14 2A4 5A When the crest factor is set to 6 Current 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA 100 mA 250 mA 500 mA 1A 2 5A Example INPUT CURRENT POJUMP ALL OFF INPut CURRent POJump ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the jump destination range of the specified element that is used when a current peak over range occurs Syntax INPut CURRent POJump ELEMent lt x gt OFF lt Current gt INPut CURRent POJump ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element OFF No jump destination current range lt Current gt See INPut CURRent POJump ALL INPUT CURRENT POJUMP ELEMENT1 50A INPUT CURRENT POJUMP ELEMENT1 gt INPUT CURRENT POJUMP ELEMENT1 50 0E 00 Example INPut CURRent RANGe Function Queries the electric current ranges of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent RANGe IM WT1801 17EN 5 59 spuewwos uoljesiunwwog 5 13 INPut Group INPut CURRent RANGe ALL Function Collectively sets the electric current range of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent RANGe ALL lt Curre nt gt EXTernal lt Voltage gt 50A input elements When the crest factor is set to 3 Current 1A 2 A 5A 10A 20A 50A for direct current input Voltage 50 mV 100 mV 200 mV 500 mV 1V 2V 5 V 10 V for external current sensor input When the crest factor is set to 6 Current 500 mA 1A 2 5A 5A 10A 25 A for dir
86. 3 RST Initializes the settings 5 103 SRE Sets or queries the service request enable register 5 103 STB Queries the status byte register 5 103 TRG Executes single measurement the same operation as when SINGLE is 5 103 pressed TST Performs a self test and queries the result 5 104 WAI Holds the execution of the subsequent command until the completion of the 5 104 specified overlap command IM WT1801 17EN 5 15 spuewwog 5 2 AOUTput Group The commands in this group deal with D A output You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing UTILITY on the front panel and then using the D A Output Items menu The commands in this group are only valid on models with the D A output DA option AOUTput Function Queries all D A output settings Syntax AOUTput AOUTput NORMal Function Queries all D A output settings Syntax AOUTput NORMal AOUTput NORMal1 CHANnel lt x gt Function Sets or queries a D A output item function element or harmonic order Syntax AOUTput NORMal CHANnel lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt AOUTput NORMal CHANnel lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 20 output channel NONE No output item Function URMS IRMS P S Q Element NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt NRf gt 1 to 6 Order TOTal DC lt NR gt lt NR gt 1 to 500 Example AOUTPUT NORMAL CHANNEL1 URMS 1 AO
87. 3 53E 400 1 0164E 00 105 23E 00 U1 1 11 1 P1 1 U1 2 11 2 P1 2 omitted U1 100 I1 100 P1 100 300 3 x 100 data entries When NUMeric FORMat is set to FLOat NUMERIC HSPEED VALUE gt N N digit byte number data byte Sequence Description This command is only valid on models with the high speed data capturing HS option The number of data records that were captured in a single data update interval are output in the order that they were captured Asingle numeric data record contains the following numeric data If lt NRf gt is omitted the numeric data record contains the numeric data of the items from 1 to the number specified by the NUMeric HSPeed NUMber command up to 30 items If lt NRf gt is specified the numeric data record contains the single numeric data entry of the specified item number regardless of the value set by the NUMeric HSPeed NUMber command In ASCII format numeric data entries and data records are both separated by commas Forthe formats of the individual numeric data items that are output see Numeric Data Formats at the end of this group of commands page 5 87 5 82 IM WT1801 17EN 5 17 NUMeric Group Before data capturing starts or after measurement conditions are changed the number of data captures is 0 Therefore there are no data records The response that is returned is described below In ASCII format there
88. 58 CONFig ELEMent lt x gt element NPut CURRent EXTSensor Sets or queries the display mode of the external current sensor range 5 58 DISPlay NPut CURRent EXTSensor Queries the jump destination ranges of all elements that are used when a 5 58 POJump current peak over range occurs NPut CURRent EXTSensor Collectively sets the jump destination range of all elements that is used when 5 59 POJump ALL a current peak over range occurs NPut CURRent EXTSensor Sets or queries the jump destination range of the specified element thatis 5 59 POJump ELEMent lt x gt used when a current peak over range occurs NPut CURRent POJump Queries the jump destination ranges of all elements that are used when a 5 59 current peak over range occurs NPut CURRent POJump ALL Collectively sets the jump destination range of all elements that is used when 5 59 a current peak over range occurs NPut CURRent POJump Sets or queries the jump destination range of the specified element thatis 5 59 ELEMent lt x gt used when a current peak over range occurs NPut CURRent RANGe Queries the electric current ranges of all elements 5 59 NPut CURRent RANGe ALL Collectively sets the electric current range of all elements 5 60 NPut CURRent RANGe Sets or queries the electric current range of the specified element 5 60 ELEMent lt x gt INPut CURRent RANGe Collectively sets the electric current range of all the elements that belong
89. 71 MEASure EFFiciency ETA x Sets or queries the efficiency equation 5 71 MEASure EFFiciency UDEF x Sets or queries the user defined parameters used in the efficiency equation 5 71 MEASure EVENt x Queries all the settings of the specified user defined event 5 71 MEASure EVENt x EXPRession Queries all the settings of the specified user defined event s expression 5 71 MEASure EVENt x EXPRession Sets or queries the specified user defined event s expression compound 5 71 CONDition condition type MEASure EVENt x EXPRession Sets or queries the on off status of the logic inversion of the specified user 5 71 INVerse defined event s expression compound condition type MEASure EVENt x EXPRession Sets or queries the target item of the specified user defined event s 5 72 ITEM expression range defined type MEASure EVENt x EXPRession Sets or queries the range of the specified user defined event s expression 5 72 LIMit x range defined type MEASure EVENt x EXPRession Queries the specified user defined event s expression as a string 5 72 STRing MEASure EVENt x EXPRession Sets or queries the specified user defined event s expression type 5 72 TYPE MEASure EVENt x FLABel Sets or queries the string that is displayed when the specified user defined 5 72 event s condition is not met MEASure EVENt x NAME Sets or queries the specified user defined event s name 5 72 MEASure EVENt x STATe Se
90. ALCulate P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt NRf gt 1 000E 12 to 1 000E 12 Example MOTOR TORQUE LSCALE CALCULATE P1X 0 MOTOR TORQUE LSCALE CALCULATE PIX gt MOTOR TORQUE LSCALE CALCULATE P1X 0 000E 00 MOTor TORQue LSCale CALCulate EXECute Function Calculates parameters for the linear scale of the torque signal analog input type Syntax MOTor TORQue LSCale CALCulate EXECute Example MOTOR TORQUE LSCALE CALCULATE EXECUTE Description The WT1800 uses the data that has been specified Point1X Point1Y Point2X and Point2Y to calculate and set the slope A and offset B of the linear scale MOTor TORQue PRANge Function Sets or queries the range of the torque signal pulse input type Syntax MOTor TORQue PRANge lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MOTor TORQue PRANge NRf 10000 0000 to 10000 0000 MOTOR TORQUE PRANGE 50 50 MOTOR TORQUE PRANGE gt MOTOR TORQUE PRANGE 50 0000 50 0000 Description Set the upper limit and then the lower limit Example This command is valid when the torque signal input type MOTor TORQue TYPE is set to PULSe pulse input Function Queries all parameter calculation settings for the linear scale of the torque signal analog input MOTor TORQue RANGe type Function Sets or queries the voltage range of the torque Syntax MOTor TORQue LSCale CALCulate signal analog input type Syntax MOTor TORQ
91. ARGet Function Queries all settings for the target of the NULL feature Syntax INPut NULL TARGet INPut NULL TARGet MODE Function Sets or queries the selection mode for the target of the NULL feature Syntax INPut NULL TARGet MODE ALL SELect INPut NULL TARGet MODE Example INPUT NULL TARGET MODE ALL INPUT NULL TARGET MODE gt INPUT NULL TARGET MODE ALL INPut NULL TARGet SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt Function Sets or queries the target of the NULL operation rotating speed torque or AUX Syntax INPut NULL TARGet SPEed TORQue AUX x ON HOLD OFF INPut NULL TARGet SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt x 1 or 2 AUX input channel ON NULL feature enabled When NULL is set to ON a new NULL value is acquired HOLD NULL feature enabled When NULL is set to ON the previous NULL value is maintained OFF NULL feature disabled NULL operation is not performed INPUT NULL TARGET SPEED ON INPUT NULL TARGET SPEED gt INPUT NULL TARGET SPEED ON Description SPEed and TORQue are only valid on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option AUX lt x gt is only valid on models with the auxiliary input AUX option Example 5 62 IM WT1801 17EN 5 13 INPut Group INPut NULL TARGet U lt x gt I lt x gt Function Sets or queries the target of the voltage or current NULL operation of the specified ele
92. ATRix CURSor lt NRf gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix CURSor lt NRf gt 1 to 81 item number Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX CURSOR 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX CURSOR gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX CURSOR 1 Description Use an item number to specify the cursor position IM WT1801 17EN 5 31 spuewwosy uorneoiunululo 2 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix ITEM lt x gt Function Sets or queries the specified display item function and harmonic order on the numeric display in matrix display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix ITEM x NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 81 item number NONE No display item Function URMS IRMS PISIQI Element NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt NRf gt 1 to 6 Order TOTal DC lt NR gt lt NRf gt 1 to 500 Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX TEM1 URMS LAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX S gt LAY NU URMS LAY NU UK 1 LAY NU e LAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX TEM1 UK 1 1 Description For information about the options available for lt Function gt see Function Option List 1 on page 5 38 The lt Element gt setting has no effect on the display If lt Element gt is omitted the element is set to 1 If Order is omitted the order is set to TOTal Element and Order
93. Address Universal commands commands IFC REN GTL LLO IDY SDC DCL PPC PPU GET SPE TCT SPD Listener Talker Secondary address address commands The WT1800 supports interface messages marked with a Note Difference between SDC and DCL In multi line messages SDC messages are address commands that require talker or listener designation and DCL messages are universal commands that do not require a designation Therefore SDC messages are directed at a particular instrument while DCL messages are directed at all instruments on the bus IM WT1801 17EN Chapter 4 4 1 Messages Programming Overview Messages Messages are used to exchange information between the controller and the WT1800 Messages that are sent from the controller to the WT1800 are called program messages and messages that are sent from the WT1800 back to the controller are called response messages If a program message contains a command that requests a response query the WT1800 retums a response message upon receiving the program message The WT1800 returns a single response message in response to a single program message Program Messages The program message format is shown below O lt Program message unit gt lt PMT gt lt Program Message Unit gt A program message consists of one or more program message units Each unit corresponds to one command The W
94. BF FILE LOAD SETup FILEI INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 lt PMT gt COMMunicate OVERlap HFFBF enables overlapping for commands other than media access Because overlapping of file loading is disabled FILE LOAD SETup operates in the same way as a sequential command Thus INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 is not executed until file loading is completed Using the OPC command The OPC command sets the OPC bit which is bit 0 in the standard event register see page 6 4 for details to 1 when the overlapping is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H0040 ESE 1 ESR SRE 32 FILE LOAD SETup FILE1 OPC lt PMT gt Read the response to ESR Wait for a service request INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 lt PMT gt The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to select which command to apply OPC to Here it is applied to the media access command ESE land SRE 32 indicate that a service request is only generated when the OPC bit becomes 1 ESR clears the standard event register n the example above INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 is not executed until a service request is generated E Using the OPC query The OPC query generates a response when an overlapping operation is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H0040 FILE LOAD SETup FILE1 OPC lt PMT gt
95. CALing STATe Queries the on off statuses of the scaling of all elements 5 63 INPut SCALing STATe ALL Collectively sets the on off status of the scaling of all elements 5 63 INPut SCALing STATe Sets or queries the on off status of the scaling of the specified element 5 63 ELEMent lt x gt INPut Queries the VT ratios CT ratios or power coefficients of all elements 5 63 Oo SCALing VT CT SFACtor o INPut Collectively sets the VT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient of all elements 5 63 3 SCALing VT CT SFACtor ALL 2 INPut Sets or queries the VT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient of the specified 5 63 g SCALing VT CT SFACtor element ELEMent lt x gt INPut SCALing VT CT Collectively sets the VT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient of all the 5 64 SFACtor SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C INPut SYNChronize Queries the synchronization sources of all elements 5 64 INPut SYNChronize ALL Collectively sets the synchronization source of all elements 5 64 INPut SYNChronize ELEMent lt x gt Sets or queries the synchronization source of the specified element 5 64 INPut SYNChronize Collectively sets the synchronization source of all the elements that belong 5 64 SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C INPut VOLTage Queries all voltage measurement settings 5 64 INPut VOLTage AUTO Queries the v
96. Connector RJ 45 Switching between Remote and Local Modes Switching from Local to Remote Mode The WT1800 switches to remote mode when it is in local mode and it receives a COMMunicate REMote ON command from the PC The REMOTE indicator illuminates All keys except the LOCAL key are disabled The local mode settings are retained even when the WT1800 switches to remote mode Switching from Remote to Local Mode When the WT1800 is in remote mode and you press LOCAL the WT1800 switches to local mode However this does not work if the WT1800 has received a COMMunicate LOCKout ON command from the PC The WT1800 switches to local mode when it receives a COMMunicate REMote OFF command from the PC regardless of the local lockout state The REMOTE indicator turns off Key operations are enabled Settings entered in remote mode are retained even when the WT 1800 switches to local mode Note You cannot use the Ethernet interface simultaneously with other interfaces GP IB and USB interfaces Setting the Timeout Value If the WT1800 is not accessed within a given period of time specified by the timeout value it will disconnect from the network The timeout value can be set from 0 to 3600 s The default value is O s For instructions on how to set the timeout value see section 1 4 Configuring the WT1800 Ethernet Settings IM WT1801 17EN 1 3 Connecting to the Ethernet Interface Connection Procedu
97. D Sets or queries the on off hold release status of the waveform display data 5 100 hold feature for all waveforms WAVeform LENGth Queries the total number of points of the waveform specified by the 5 100 WAVeform TRACe command WAVeform SEND Queries the waveform display data specified by the WAVeform TRACe 5 101 command WAVeform SRATe Queries the sample rate of the acquired waveform 5 101 WAVeform STARt Sets or queries the output start point of the waveform display data that is 5 101 transmitted by the WAVeform SEND command WAVeform TRACe Sets or queries the target waveform for the WAVeform SEND command 5 101 WAVeform TRIGger Queries the trigger position of the acquired waveform 5 101 Common Command Group CAL Executes zero calibration zero level compensation the same operation as 5 102 pressing CAL SHIFT SINGLE and queries the result CLS Clears the standard event register extended event register and error queue 5 102 ESE Sets or queries the standard event enable register 5 102 ESR Queries and clears the standard event register 5 102 IDN Queries the instrument model 5 102 OPC Sets bit 0 the OPC bit of the standard event register to 1 upon the 5 102 completion of the specified overlap command OPC Returns ASCII code 1 if the specified overlap command has finished 5 103 OPT Queries the installed options 5 10
98. E Ce Co 0G s Es UTILITY key page 2 4 Press this key to view the serial number that is used in USB TMC communication wal amp z z z z aj oO li p p ee p A sr jd NO 410 a e x 3omvz wax Lino ax Lumvzwa ovs Jv War m A EXT As ext AN EXT Aver Q y lO O o t A av A A A A 9 4 Q A i oma oor sv wow NS Lv NS A cupsgur cupnpur cupan A A SU VAT ETEITS a A on IL ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS ALL TERMINALS BN amp 3 000v max ro J 000v max ro A GS 1000v wax To ey 00V MAX TO GN A ranun max stinore lt Ox 5 USB port This port is for connecting the WT1800 to a controller such as a PC usin
99. EASURE AVERAGING COUNT gt MEASURE AVERAGING COUNT 2 Description The averaging of harmonic measurement functions option is only valid when TYPE is set to EXPonent attenuation constant For details see the features guide IM WT1801 01EN Q X EDS X MEASure AVERaging STATe Function Sets or queries the on off status of averaging Syntax MEASure AVERaging STATe Boolean MEASure AVERaging STATe MEASURE AVERAGING STATE ON MEASURE AVERAGING STATE MEASURE AVERAGING STATE 1 Example MEASure AVERaging TYPE Function Sets or queries the averaging type Syntax MEASure AVERaging TYPE EXPonent LINear MEASure AVERaging TYPE MEASURE AVERAGING TYPE EXPONENT MEASURE AVERAGING TYPE MEASURE AVERAGING TYPE EXPONENT Description The averaging of harmonic measurement functions option is only valid when the type is set to EXPonent For details see the features guide IM WT1801 01EN Example MEASure DMeasure Function Queries all delta computation settings Syntax MEASure DMeasure Description This command is only valid on models with the delta computation DT option MEASure DMeasure MODE Function Sets or queries the voltage or current mode that is used in delta computation Syntax MEASure DMeasure MODE RMS MEAN DC RMEAN AC MEASure DMeasure MODE MEASURE DMEASURE MODE RMS MEASURE DMEASURE MODE gt MEASURE DMEASURE MODE RMS Descr
100. ESET 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX PRESET EORIGIN The numeric display item display pattern order will be the same as the order when the displayed items are reset using the ITEM setup menu that is displayed on the WT1800 screen Reset Items Exec For details on the display pattern that appears when the displayed items are reset see the getting started guide IM WT1801 03EN DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 Function Syntax Queries all numeric display settings in 4 Items 8 Items or 16 Items display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 CURSor Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries the cursor position on the numeric display in 4 Items 8 Items or 16 Items display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 CURSor lt NRf gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 CURSor lt NRf gt to 48 item number when VAL4 is specified lt NRf gt to 96 item number when VAL8 is specified lt NRf gt to 192 item number when VAL16 is specified DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 CURSOR 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 CURSOR gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 CURSOR 1 Use an item number to specify the cursor position 5 32 IM WT1801 17EN 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 ITEM lt x gt Funct
101. Eed PULSe Sets or queries the number of pulses of the revolution signal pulse input 5 77 type MOTor SPEed RANGe Sets or queries the voltage range of the revolution signal analog input type 5 77 MOTor SPEed SCALing Sets or queries the rotating speed computation scaling factor 5 77 IM WT1801 17EN 5 11 spueululo2 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page MOTor SPEed TYPE Sets or queries the revolution signal input type 5 77 MOTor SPEed UNIT Sets or queries the unit that is added to the rotating speed computation 5 77 result MOTor SSPeed Sets or queries the frequency measurement source for the synchronous 5 77 speed SyncSp computation MOTor SYNChronize Sets or queries the synchronization source for the rotating speed Speed 5 77 and torque Torque computations MOTor TORQue Queries all torque Torque settings 5 77 MOTor TORQue AUTO Sets or queries the voltage auto range on off status of the torque signal 5 78 analog input type MOTor TORQue LSCale Queries all torque signal analog input type linear scaling settings 5 78 MOTor TORQue LSCale AVALue Sets or queries the slope A of the linear scale of the torque signal analog 5 78 input type MOTor TORQue LSCale BVALue Sets or queries the offset B of the linear scale of the torque signal analog 5 78 input type MOTor TORQue LSCale CALCulate Queries all parameter calculation settings f
102. FRAMe Example HSPEED DISPLAY FRAME ON HSPEED DISPLAY FRAME gt HSPEED DISPLAY FRAME 1 Description This command performs the same setting as the DISPlay NUMeric FRAMe command IM WT1801 17EN 5 49 spuewwos uorneoiunuluio 2 5 11 HSPeed Group HSPeed DISPlay PAGE Function Sets or queries the display page of high speed data capturing mode Syntax HSPeed DISPlay PAGE lt NRf gt HSPeed DISPlay PAGE lt NRf gt lor 2 page number lt NRf gt 1 to 4 on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option or auxiliary input AUX option HSPEED DISPLAY PAGE 1 HSPEED DISPLAY PAGE gt HSPEED DISPLAY PAGE 1 Example HSPeed DISPlay POVer Function Sets or queries the on off status of the display of peak over range information in high speed data capturing mode Syntax HSPeed DISPlay POVer lt Boolean gt HSPeed DISPlay POVer Example HSPEED DISPLAY POVER OFF HSPEED DISPLAY POVER gt HSPEED DISPLAY POVER 0 HSPeed EXTSync Function Sets or queries the on off status of the high speed data capturing s external synchronization signal Syntax HSPeed EXTSync Boolean HSPeed EXTSync Example HSPEED EXTSYNC OFF HSPEED EXTSYNC gt HSPEED EXTSYNC 0 HSPeed FILTer Function Queries all high speed data capturing filter settings Syntax HSPeed FILTer HSPeed FILTer HS Function Sets or queries the high speed data capturing digital
103. Function Queries all the settings for the feature that automatically turns off the backlight Syntax SYSTem LCD AOFF SYSTem LCD AOFF STATe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the feature that automatically turns off the backlight Syntax SYSTem LCD AOFF STATe lt Boolean gt SYSTem LCD AOFF STATe Example SYSTEM LCD AOFF STATE ON SYSTEM LCD AOFF STATE gt SYSTEM LCD AOFF STATE 1 SYSTem LCD AOFF TIME Function Sets or queries the amount of time until the backlight is automatically turned off Syntax SYSTem LCD AOFF TIME lt NRf gt SYSTem LCD AOFF TIME lt NRf gt 1 to 60 minutes Example SYSTEM LCD AOFF TIME 5 SYSTEM LCD AOFF TIME gt SYSTEM LCD AOFF TIME 5 SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness Function Sets or queries the LCD brightness Syntax SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness lt NRf gt SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness lt NRf gt 1 to 10 Example SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS 7 SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS gt SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS 7 SYSTem LCD COLor Function Queries all LCD color settings Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor SYSTem LCD COLor BASecolor Function Sets or queries the screen menu base color Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor BASecolor BLUE GRAY SYSTem LCD COLor BASecolor Example SYSTEM LCD COLOR BASECOLOR BLUE SYSTEM LCD COLOR BASECOLOR SYSTEM LCD COLOR BASECOLOR BLUE SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh Function Queries all waveform color settings Syntax SYSTem
104. GURE ELEMENT1 1 Description This command is only valid on models with the simultaneous dual harmonic measurement G6 option The x value in HARMonics lt x gt has no meaning in the setting or query Example H E A E NR A A HARMonics lt x gt CONFigure SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Function Syntax Example Description This command is only valid on models with HARMonics lt x gt ORDer Function Syntax Example Collectively sets the harmonic measurement group of all the elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or C HARMonics lt x gt CONFigure SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC NRf lt NRf gt 1 Hrm1 2 Hrm2 HARMONICS CONFIGURE SIGMA 1 the simultaneous dual harmonic measurement G6 option The lt x gt value in HARMonics lt x gt has no meaning in the setting Sets or queries the maximum and minimum harmonic orders that are analyzed HARMonics lt x gt ORDer lt NRf gt lt NRf gt HARMonics lt x gt ORDer lt x gt 1 or 2 harmonic measurement group First lt NRf gt 0 or 1 minimum spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 harmonic order that is analyzed Second lt NRf gt 1 to 500 maximum harmonic order that is analyzed HARMONICS ORDER 1 100 HARMONICS ORDER gt HARMONICS1 ORDER 1 100 HARMonics lt x gt PLLSource Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the PLL source HARMonics x PLLSource U lt x
105. LCD COLor GRAPh 5 98 IM WT1801 17EN 5 21 SYSTem Group SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh CHANnel lt x gt Function Sets or queries the specified waveform s color Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh CHANnel lt x gt YELLow GREen MAGenta CYAN RED ORANge LBLue PURPle BLUE PINK LGReen DBLue BGReen SPINk MGReen GRAY SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh CHANnel lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 16 waveform channel YELLow Yellow GREen Green MAGenta Magenta CYAN Cyan RED Red RANge Orange LBLue Light blue PURPle Purple BLUE Blue PINK Pink o LGReen Light green DBLue Dark blue BGReen Blue green SPINk Salmon pink MGReen Mild green GRAY Gray Example SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH CHANNEL1 YELLOW SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH CHANNEL1 gt SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH CHANNEL1 YELLOW SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh PRESet Function Presets the waveform color pattern Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh PRESet DEFault CLASsic Example SYSTEM LCD COLOR GRAPH PRESET DEFAULT SYSTem LCD COLor INTENsity GRID Function Sets or queries the grid intensity Syntax SYSTem LCD COLor INTENsity GRID NRf SYSTem LCD COLor ENsity GRID lt NRf gt to 8 grid intensity Example SYSTEM LCD COLOR INTENSITY GRID 4 SYSTEM LCD COLOR INTENSITY GRID gt SYSTEM LCD COLOR INTENSITY GRID 4 z SYSTem LCD
106. LEMENT1 10 5 2 1 NPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR CONFIG ELEMENT1 gt NPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR CONFIG ELEMENT1 10 00E 00 5 00E 00 2 00E 00 1 00E 00 Description In the parameters list all the external current sensor ranges that you want to enable To enable all the ranges specify the parameter ALL INPut CURRent EXTSensor DISPlay Function Sets or queries the display mode of the external current sensor range Syntax INPut CURRent EXTSensor DISPlay DIRect MEASure INPut CURRent EXTSensor DISPlay Example INPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR DISPLAY DIRECT INPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR DISPLAY gt INPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR DISPLAY DIRECT INPut CURRent EXTSensor POJump Function Queries the jump destination ranges of all elements that are used when a current peak over range occurs Syntax INPut CURRent EXTSensor POJump 5 58 IM WT1801 17EN 5 13 INPut Group INPut CURRent EXTSensor POJump ALL Function Collectively sets the jump destination range of all elements that is used when a current peak over range occurs Syntax INPut CURRent EXTSensor POJump ALL OFF lt Voltage gt OFF No jump destination current range When the crest factor is set to 3 Voltage 50 mV 100 mV 200 mV 500 mV 1 V 2V 5V 10V When the crest factor is set to 6 Voltage 25 mV 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500mV 1V 2 5V
107. LEMENT1 EXTERNAL 10 00E 00 INPut CURRent RANGe SIGMA SITGMB SIGMC Function Collectively sets the electric current range of all the elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or XC Syntax INPut CURRent RANGe SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt Current gt EXTernal lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt Voltage gt See INPut CURRent RANGe ALL Example INPUT CURRENT RANGE SIGMA 50A INPUT CURRENT RANGE SIGMA EXTERNAL 10V Description SIGMA SIGMB or SIGMC is invalid if the wiring system setting INPut WIRing is made in such a way that the corresponding wiring unit 2A 2B or 2C does not exist INPut CURRent SRATio Function Queries the external current sensor conversion ratios of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent SRATio Description This command is only valid on models with the external current sensor input EX option INPut CURRent SRATio ALL Function Collectively sets the external current sensor conversion ratios of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent SRATio ALL lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example INPUT CURRENT SRATIO ALL 10 INPut CURRent SRATio ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the external current sensor conversion ratio of the specified element Syntax INPut CURRent SRATio ELEMent lt x gt lt NRf gt INPut CURRent SRATio ELEMent lt x gt lt x g
108. M minute SS second Example SYSTEM TIME 14 30 00 SYSTEM TIME gt 14 30 00 SYSTem USBKeyboard Function Sets or queries the USB keyboard type Syntax SYSTem USBKeyboard JAPANese ENGLish SYSTem USBKeyboard Example SYSTEM USBKEYBOARD JAPANESE SYSTEM USBKEYBOARD gt SYSTEM USBKEYBOARD JAPANESE IM WT1801 17EN 5 99 5 22 WAVeform Group The commands in this group deal with the acquired waveform data There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group WAVeform Function Queries all waveform display data output settings Syntax WAVeform WAVeform BYTeorder Function Sets or queries the output byte order of the waveform display data FLOAT format that is transmitted by the WAVeform SEND command Syntax WAVeform BYTeorder LSBFirst MSBFirst WAVeform BYTeorder WAVEFORM BYTEORDER MSBFIRST WAVEFORM BYTEORDER gt WAVEFORM BYTEORDER MSBFIRST Description This command is valid when WAVeform FORMat is set to FLOat Example WAVeform END Function Sets or queries the output end point of the waveform display data that is transmitted by the WAVeform SEND command WAVeform HOLD Function Sets or queries the on off hold release status of the waveform display data hold feature for all waveforms Syntax WAVeform HOLD lt Boolean gt WAVeform HOLD WAVEFORM HOLD ON WAVEFORM HOLD gt WAVEFORM HOLD 1 Description If
109. Me command 5 24 IM WT1801 17EN 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay HSPeed PAGE DISPlay MODE Function Sets or queries the displayed page of the high Function Sets or queries the display mode speed data capturing mode Syntax DISPlay MODE NUMeric WAVE TRENd Syntax DISPlay HSPeed PAGE lt NRf gt BAR VECTor NWAVe NTRend NBAR DISPlay HSPeed PAGE NVECtor WNUMeric WTRend WBAR NRf 1 to 2 page number WVECtor TNUMeric TWAVe TBAR TVECtor lt NRf gt 1 to 4 on models with the HSPeed motor evaluation function MTR DISPlay MODE UMeric Numeric display option or the auxiliary input AUX zi 2 D VE Waveform display RENd Trend display R Bar graph display option Example DISPLAY HSPEED PAGE 1 DISPLAY HSPEED PAGE gt WH D VECTor Vector display DISPLAY HSPEED PAGE 1 NWAVe Numeric and waveform displays NTRend Numeric and trend displays DISPlay HSPeed POVer NBAR Numeric and bar graph displays Function Sets or queries the on off status of the display of NVECtor Numeric and vector displays peak over range information in high speed data WNUMeric Waveform and numeric displays capturing mode WTRend Waveform and trend displays Syntax DISPlay HSPeed POVer lt Boolean gt WBAR Waveform and bar graph displays o DISPlay HSPeed POVer ee Waveform and Meehan ciepiey E Example DISPLAY HSPEED iPOVER OFF TNUMeric Trend and numeric Qisphayg 3 TSITA ASPERIS POVERO e
110. NO zy ar a1 Z Page zero level compensation esses IM WT1801 01EN Index 3
111. NT CASE1 FILE SAVE COMMENT gt FILE SAVE COMMENT CASE1 Example FILE SAVE NUMeric EXECute Function Saves numeric data to a file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric EXECute lt String gt lt String gt File name Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC EXECUTE NUM Description Specify the file name without an extension This command is an overlap command FILE SAVE NUMeric ITEM Function Sets or queries the method that is used to select which items are saved when numeric data is saved to a file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric ITEM DISPlayed SELected FILE SAVE NUMeric ITEM DISPlayed Automatic selection method in which all the items that are displayed on the screen are selected SELected Manual selection method FILE SAVE NUMERIC ITEM SELECTED FILE SAVE NUMERIC ITEM gt FILE SAVE NUMERIC ITEM SELECTED Description The available options are explained below DISPlayed The numeric items that are displayed on the screen are saved to the file SELected The numeric items that are specified with the commands that start with FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal are saved to the file Example FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Function Queries all numeric data file save settings for the manual save item selection method Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Description This command is valid when the save item selection method FILE SAVE NUMeric ITEM is set to SELected
112. OFF IMAGE COLOR gt IMAGE COLOR OFF IMAGe COMMent Function Sets or queries the comment displayed at the bottom of the screen Syntax IMAGe COMMent lt String gt IMAGe COMMent lt String gt Up to 30 characters Example IMAGE COMMENT THIS IS TEST IMAGE COMMENT gt IMAGE COMMENT THIS IS TEST IMAGe EXECute Function Executes a screen image data output operation Syntax IMAGe EXECute Example IMAGE EXECUTE IMAGe FORMat Function Sets or queries the format of the screen image data that will be saved Syntax IMAGe FORMat BMP PNG JPEG IMAGe FORMat Example IMAGE FORMAT BMP IMAGE FORMAT IMAGE FORMAT BMP IMAGe SAVE Function Queries all screen image data save settings Syntax IMAGe SAVE IMAGe SAVE ANAMing Function Sets or queries the auto naming feature for saving files Syntax IMAGe SAVE ANAMing OFF NUMBering DATE IMAGe SAVE ANAMing Example IMAGE SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING IMAGE SAVE ANAMING gt IMAGE SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING IMAGe SAVE CDIRectory Function Changes the directory that screen image data is saved to Syntax IMAGe SAVE CDIRectory String String Directory name Example IMAGE SAVE CDIRECTORY IMAGE Description Specify to move up to the parent directory IMAGe SAVE DRIVe Function Sets the drive that screen image data is saved to Syntax IMAGe SAVE DRIVe RAM USB NRf
113. PEED RECORD ITEM ON HSPEED RECORD ITEM I1 gt HSPEED RECORD ITEM at HSPeed RECord ITEM PXx PA PB PC Function Sets or queries whether the specified element or wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C of the numeric data active power will be saved Syntax HSPeed RECord ITEM P x PA PB PC lt Boolean gt HSPeed RECord ITEM PXx PA PB PC x 1 to 6 element PA PB PC PZA PZB P C Example HSPEED RECORD ITEM P1 ON HSPEED RECORD ITEM P1 gt HSPEED RECORD ITEM P1 1 HSPeed RECord ITEM SPEed TORQue PM Function Sets or queries whether the rotating speed torque or motor output of the numeric data motor will be saved Syntax HSPeed RECord ITEM SPEed TORQue PM lt Boolean gt HSPeed RECord ITEM SPEed TORQue PM Example HSPEED RECORD ITEM SPEED ON HSPEED RECORD ITEM SPEED gt HSPEED RECORD ITEM SPEED 1 Description This is only valid on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option 5 52 IM WT1801 17EN 5 11 HSPeed Group HSPeed RECord ITEM U lt x gt UA UB UC Function Sets or queries whether the specified element or wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C of the numeric data voltage will be saved Syntax HSPeed RECord ITEM U lt x gt UA UB UC lt Boolean gt HSPeed RECord ITEM U lt x gt UA UB UC lt x gt 1 to 6 element UA UB UC UXA UZB UXC Example HS
114. PEED RECORD ITEM U1 ON HSPEED RECORD ITEM U1 gt HSPEED RECORD ITEM U1 1 HSPeed RECord ITEM PRESet ALL Function Sets at the same time whether all numeric data items will be saved Syntax HSPeed RECord ITEM PRESet ALL lt Boolean gt Example HSPEED RECORD ITEM PRESET ALL ON HSPeed RECord ITEM PRESet ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Function Sets at the same time whether the specified element or wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C of all the types of numeric data will be saved Syntax HSPeed RECord ITEM PRESet ELEMent x SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt Boolean gt x 1 to 6 HSPEED RECORD ITEM PRESET ELEMENT1 ON Example HSPeed RECord ITEM PRESet U I P MOTor AUX Function Sets at the same time whether the specified functions of all types of numeric data will be saved Syntax HSPeed RECord ITEM PRESet U I P MOTor AUX lt Boolean gt Example HSPEED RECORD ITEM PRESET U ON Description MOTor is only valid on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option AUX is only valid on models with the auxiliary input AUX option HSPeed RECord STATe Function Sets or queries whether acquired numeric data is saved to a file Syntax HSPeed RECord STATe Boolean HSPeed RECord STATe HSPEED RECORD STATE ON HSPEED RECORD STATE HSPEED RECORD STATE 1 Example HSPeed STARt Function Starts data capt
115. Page HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert Queries all settings related to the conversion of files of acquired numeric 5 51 data into CSV format HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert Aborts the conversion of the specified file of acquired numeric data to CSV 5 51 ABORt format HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert Sets or queries the on off status of the automatic conversion of files of 5 51 AUTO acquired numeric data to CSV format HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert Converts the specified file of acquired numeric data to CSV format 5 51 EXECute HSPeed RECord FILE DRIVe Sets the drive that acquired numeric data is saved to 5 52 HSPeed RECord FILE FREE Queries the free space in bytes on the drive that the acquired numeric data 5 52 will be saved to HSPeed RECord FILE NAME Sets or queries the name of the file that acquired numeric data will be saved 5 52 to HSPeed RECord FILE PATH Queries the absolute path of the directory that the acquired numeric data will 5 52 be saved to HSPeed RECord FILE STATe Queries the status of the file save operation being performed on the acquired 5 52 numeric data HSPeed RECord ITEM Queries all settings for the numeric data items that will be saved to a file 5 52 HSPeed RECord ITEM AUX lt x gt Sets or queries whether numeric data auxiliary input is saved to a file 5 52 HSPeed RECord Sets or queries whether the specified element or wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C 5 52 TEM I lt x gt IA IB IC of the n
116. Play WAVE POSition U lt x gt I lt x gt Function Sets or queries the vertical position center position level of the specified element s voltage or current waveform Syntax DISPlay WAVE POSition U lt x gt I lt x gt lt NRf gt DISPlay WAVE POSition U lt x gt I lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element lt NRf gt 130 000 to 130 000 DISPLAY WAVE POSITION U1 0 DISPLAY WAVE POSITION U1 gt SPLAY WAVE POSITION U1 0 000 Example U DISPlay WAVE POSition UALL IALL Function Collectively sets the vertical positions center position levels of the voltage or current waveforms of all elements Syntax DISPlay WAVE POSition UALL IALL lt NRf gt NRf 130 000 to 130 000 Example DISPLAY WAVE POSITION UALL 0 DISPlay WAVE SVALue Function Sets or queries the on off status of the scale value display Syntax DISPlay WAVE SVALue Boolean DISPlay WAVE SVALue Example DISPLAY WAVE SVALUE ON DISPLAY WAVE SVALUE DISPLAY WAVE SVALUE 1 DISPlay WAVE TDIV Function Sets or queries the waveform Time div value Syntax DISPlay WAVE TDIV lt Time gt DISPlay WAVE TDIV Time 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 ms 1 2 s Example DISPLAY WAVE TDIV 5MS DISPLAY WAVE TDIV DISPLAY WAVE TDIV 5 00E 03 Description The specifiable Time div value is up to 1 10 of the data update rate RATE DISPlay WAVE TLAB
117. Play Group 2 Numeric list data functions these functions require the harmonic measurement option Applicable commands DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion lt Function gt lt Element gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST ITEM lt x gt lt Function gt lt Element gt NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Function gt Function Name Used on the Menu U U l P P S S Q Q LAMBda PHI Q9 PHIU QU PHII gl Z Z RS Rs XS Xs RP Rp XP Xp The function options listed below are only valid with NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt UHDF Uhdf IHDF Ihdf PHDF Phdf IM WT1801 17EN 5 41 spuewwoy uoneoiunululo2 5 7 FILE Group The commands in this group deal with file operations You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing FILE on the front panel FILE Function Queries all file operation settings Syntax gt FILE FILE CDIRectory Function Changes the current directory Syntax FILE CDIRectory String String Directory name Example FILE CDIRECTORY TEST Description Specify to move up to the parent directory FILE DELete IMAGe BMP PNG JPEG Function Deletes the specified screen image data file Syntax FILE DELete IMAGe BMP PNG JPEG lt String gt lt String gt File name Example FILE DELETE IMAGE BMP IMAGE1 Description Specify
118. R gt to 500 Example DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 FUNCTION URMS 1 DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 FUNCTION DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 FUNCTION URMS 1 DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 FUNCTION UK 1 1 DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 FUNCTION DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 FUNCTION UK 1 1 Description For information about the options available for Function see Function Option List 1 on page 5 38 f Element is omitted the element is set to 1 f Order is omitted the order is set to TOTal Element and Order are omitted from responses to functions that do not need them DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing Function Queries all scaling settings for the specified trend Syntax DISPlay TRENd ITEM x SCALing x 1 to 16 item number DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing MODE Function Sets or queries the scaling mode of the specified trend Syntax DISPlay TRENG ITEM x SCALing MODE AUTO MANual DISPlay TRENG ITEM x SCALing MODE x 1 to 16 item number Example DISPLAY TREND ITEMI SCALING MODE AUTO DISPLAY TREND ITEM1 SCALING MODE gt DISPLAY TREND ITEMI SCALING MODE AUTO DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing VALue Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the manual scaling of the specified trend Syntax DISPlay TRENd ITEM x SCALing VALue NRf NRf DISPlay TRENd ITEM x
119. RAMe DISPLAY NUMERIC FRAME ON DISPLAY NUMERIC FRAME gt DISPLAY NUMERIC FRAME 1 Example DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Function Queries all numeric display settings Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Description Returns all settings that correspond to the current numeric display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal FORMat DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL Function Queries all settings of the numeric display in All Items display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL 5 28 IM WT1801 17EN 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL COLumn Function Queries all column settings of the numeric display in All Items display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL COLumn Description Column display settings are only valid on models that have five or more elements DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL COLumn DAELem Function Sets or queries the on off status of the column display all feature of the numeric display in All Items display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL COLumn DAELem lt Boolean gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL COLumn DAELem Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL COLUMN DAELEM ON DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL COLUMN DAELEM gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL COLUMN DAELEM 1 Description This feature Display All Elements automatically decreases the font size to display all columns when the number of columns that should be displayed exceeds 6 a
120. Rf gt is specified only the data name for the specified item number is output f lt NRf gt is omitted the data names of the items from 1 to the number specified by the NUMeric HSPeed NUMber command are output in order NUMeric HSPeed ITEM lt x gt Function Sets or queries the output item function and element of the specified high speed data capturing mode numeric data item Syntax NUMeric HSPeed ITEM x NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt NUMeric HSPeed ITEM lt x gt lt x gt to 30 item number NONE No output item Function U I P SPEed TORQue PM AUX lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 2 Element NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC NRf 1 to 6 Example NUMERIC HSPEED ITEM1 U 1 NUMERIC HSPEED ITEM1 gt NUMERIC HSPEED ITEM1 U 1 Description This command is only valid on models with thehigh speed data capturing HS option f Element is omitted the element is set to 1 Element is omitted from responses to functions that do not need it SPEed TORQue and PM are only valid on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option AUX lt x gt is only valid on models with the auxiliary input AUX option NUMeric HSPeed MAXimum MINimum Function Queries the maximum or minimum value of the numeric data of high speed data capturing mode Syntax NUMeric HSPeed MAXimum MINimum lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 30 item
121. SET RESET RESET RESET The response is as follows RESet Integration reset READy Waiting real time integration mode STARt Integration in progress STOP Integration stop ERRor Abnormal integration termination integration overflow power failure TIMeup Integration stop due to integration timeout When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to OFF 0 you cannot use the parameter to specify the element that you want to query When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to ON 1 you can use the parameter to specify the element If the parameter is omitted the integration statuses of all elements are output in order starting with element 1 5 68 IM WT1801 17EN 5 14 INTEGrate Group INTEGrate STOP Function Stops integration Syntax INTEGrate STOP NRf NRf L lt NRf gt NR NR NR lt NRf gt 1 to 6 element Example INTEGRATE STOP stops integration on all elements INTEGRATE STOP 1 2 3 stops integration on the specified elements Description When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to ON 1 you can use the parameters to specify which elements to perform the operation on If you omit the parameters the operation will be performed on all the elements When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to OFF 0 you ca
122. SPeed FILTer LINE Queries all high speed data capturing line filter settings 5 50 HSPeed FILTer LINE ALL Sets the line filters of all the high speed data capturing elements 5 50 HSPeed FILTer LINE ELEMent lt x gt Sets or queries the line filter of the specified high speed data capturing 5 50 element HSPeed MAXCount Sets or queries the maximum number of data captures 5 50 HSPeed MEASuring Queries all high speed data capturing voltage mode or current mode settings 5 50 HSPeed MEASuring ALL Sets all voltage and current modes at the same time 5 50 HSPeed MEASuring U lt x gt I lt x gt Sets or queries the specified voltage or current mode 5 51 HSPeed MEASuring UALL IALL Sets all voltage or current modes at the same time 5 51 HSPeed POVer Queries the high speed data capturing peak over range information 5 51 HS Peed RECord Queries all high speed data capturing settings for saving data to files 5 51 HSPeed RECord FILE Queries all settings related to the saving of acquired data to files 5 51 HSPeed RECord FILE ANAMing Sets or queries the auto naming feature for saving acquired numeric data to 5 51 files HSPeed RECord FILE CDIRectory Changes the directory that acquired numeric data will be saved to 5 51 IM WT1801 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function
123. SYNChronize ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the synchronization source of the specified element Syntax INPut SYNChronize ELEMent lt x gt U lt x gt I lt x gt EXTernal NONE INPut SYNChronize ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element EXTernal External clock input Ext Clk NONE No synchronization source Example INPUT SYNCHRONIZE ELEMENT1 I1 INPUT SYNCHRONIZE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT SYNCHRONIZE ELEMENT1 I1 INPut SYNChronize SIGMA SITGMB SIGMC Function Collectively sets the synchronization source of all the elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C Syntax INPut SYNChronize SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC U lt x gt I lt x gt EXTernal NONE x 1 to 6 element EXTernal External clock input Ext Clk NONE No synchronization source Example INPUT SYNCHRONIZE SIGMA I1 Description SIGMA SIGMB or SIGMC is invalid if the wiring system setting INPut WIRing is made in such a way that the corresponding wiring unit 2A 2B or 2C does not exist INPut VOLTage Function Queries all voltage measurement settings Syntax INPut VOLTage INPut VOLTage AUTO Function Queries the voltage auto range on off statuses of all elements Syntax INPut VOLTage AUTO INPut VOLTage AUTO ALL Function Collectively sets the voltage auto range on off status of all elements Syntax INPut VOLTage AUTO ALL Boolean
124. Se lt NRf gt MOTor SPEed PULSe NRf 1 to 9999 Example MOTOR SPEED PULSE 60 MOTOR SPEED PULSE MOTOR SPEED PULSE 60 Description This command is valid when the revolution signal input type MOTor SPEed TYPE is set to PULSe pulse input MOTor SPEed RANGe Function Sets or queries the voltage range of the revolution signal analog input type MOTor SPEed RANGe lt Voltage gt MOTor SPEed RANGe Voltage 1 V 2 V 20 V MOTOR SPEED RANGE 20V MOTOR SPEED RANGE gt MOTOR SPEED RANGE 20 0E 00 Description This command is valid when the revolution signal input type MOTor SPEed TYPE is set to ANALog analog input Syntax 5b v 10 V Example MOTor SPEed SCALing Function Sets or queries the rotating speed computation scaling factor Syntax MOTor SPEed SCALing NRf MOTor SPEed SCALing NRf 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example MOTOR SPEED SCALING 1 MOTOR SPEED SCALING gt MOTOR SPEED SCALING 1 0000 MOTor SPEed TYPE Sets or queries the revolution signal input type Function Syntax Example MOTor SPEe MOTor SPEe MOTOR SPEE MOTOR SPEE MOTOR SPEE d TYPE ANALog PULSe d TYPE D TYPE ANALOG D TYPE gt D TYPE ANALOG MOTor SPEed UNIT Sets or queries the unit that is added to the Function Syntax Example Description MOTor Function Syntax Example rotating speed MOTor SPEe MOTor SPEe lt Strin
125. See section 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller and chapter 5 The description of the execution of each command See the explanations of each command s function in chapter 5 the features guide IM WT1801 01EN and the user s manual IM WT1801 02EN App 4 IM WT1801 17EN Index Symbols P D UJ s 5 32 IA SQUIDULDITO cicer co ieu auc Pan arias uU 5 60 daldio ice ene ge e noted p en dece s Le E TE S60 data update rate ue ata ere cac OO 5 66 date andlTiec soos eso rro rH qe ertet heri rius 3P3W 3V3A en DCL Device Clear sees 3P3W to 3V3A conversion eese TAO SAG ACOC PEAT sagnecadeveancisseasqenseticentey cies caste L EPA Ne REOR Eri D 5 06 decimal point typering inesi e L AA E E T AN 5 32 delta to star Conversion etre rin G MEMS co ee iere rer ie ger ro be eds 5 32 delta computation eater needed delta computation mode zi A Page delta computatiori type cette rere EU CUUCOMEEEEEEEUEKECNXREEEEEKT differential I pp differential voltage OG OSS 3 2 display mode addressable mode tni o IRR 3 2 display rasalution 5 apparent power equation eessesseeeeeeeeneee DA ee cc NEUE attenuation constant 2n auUto DFIFi tener eet mere totns on ove T
126. Service request enable Status byte mask SRE SRE register Standard event register Indicates device status changes ESR Standard event enable Standard event register mask ESE ESE register Extended event Indicates device status changes STATus EESR register Extended event enable Extended event register mask STATus EESE STATus EESE register Condition register Current device status STATus CONDition Transition filter Conditions that change the STATus FILTer lt x gt STATus FILTer lt x gt extended event register Output queue Stores response messages for Query commands queries Error queue Stores error numbers and z STATus ERRor messages Registers and Queues That Affect the Status Byte The following registers affect the status byte bits Register Affected Status Byte Bit Standard event register Sets bit 5 ESB to 1 or 0 Output queue Sets bit 4 MAV to 1 or 0 Extended event register Sets bit 3 EES to 1 or 0 Error queue Sets bit 2 EAV to 1 or 0 Enable Registers The following registers are used to mask a bit so that the bit will not affect the status byte even when the bit is set to 1 Masked Register Mask Register Status byte Service request enable register Standard event register Standard event enable register Extended event register Extended event enable register Reading and Writing to Registers For example you can use the ESE command to set the
127. Status that is displayed in the middle of the screen during capturing The peak over range information of each element is mapped as shown below For the response the sum of the values of each bit is returned in decimal format For example a response of 16 indicates that a peak over range is occurring at U3 Example 15 14 13 1211109 87 6 54 32 1 0 Tq Sp 16 U6 15 us i4 U4I3 us i2 U2 11 U1 Sp Rotating speed or AUX1 Tq Torque or AUX2 HSPeed RECord Function Queries all high speed data capturing settings for saving data to files Syntax HSPeed RECord HSPeed RECord FILE Function Queries all settings related to the saving of acquired data to files Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE Description The HSPeed RECord FILE commands perform the same settings and queries as the STORe FILE commands Excluding the STORe FILE CONVert commands HSPeed RECord FILE ANAMing Function Sets or queries the auto naming feature for saving acquired numeric data to files Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE ANAMing OFF NUMBering DATE HSPeed RECord FILE ANAMing Example HSPEED RECORD FILE ANAMING NUMBERING HSPEED RECORD FILE ANAMING gt HSPEED RECORD FILE ANAMING NUMBERING HSPeed RECord FILE CDIRectory Function Changes the directory that acquired numeric data will be saved
128. T1800 executes the commands in the order that they are received Separate each program message unit with a semicolon For details on the program message syntax see the next section Example APUC eee 3 INDependent QEF SEMIS Unit Unit lt PMT gt lt PMT gt is a program message terminator The following three terminators are available NL new line Same as LF line feed ASCII code OAH END The END message as defined by IEEE 488 1 The data byte that is sent with the END message is the last data byte of the program message NL with an END message attached NL is not included in the program message NL END Program Message Unit Syntax The program message unit syntax is shown below a lt Program data gt Program header Zu Space Program Header The program header indicates the command type For details see page 4 3 Program Data Attach program data if there are conditions that are required to execute a command Separate the program data from the header with a space ASCII code 20H If there are multiple data values separate each data value with a comma For details see page 4 6 Example INPut CFACtor 3 lt PMT gt Ne LI Header Data Response Messages The response message syntax is as follows E Response message unit lt Response Message Unit gt A response message consists of one or more response message
129. TER ALL FILE FILTER gt FILE FILTER ALL FILE FREE Function Queries the free space in bytes on the current drive Syntax FILE FREE Example FILE FREE gt 20912128 FILE LOAD ABORt Function Aborts a file loading operation Syntax FILE LOAD ABORt Example FILE LOAD ABORT FILE LOAD SETup Function Loads the specified setup parameter file Syntax FILE LOAD SETup String String File name Example FILE LOAD SETUP SETUP1 Description Specify the file name without an extension This command is an overlap command FILE PATH Function Queries the absolute path of the current directory Syntax FILE PATH Example FILE PATH gt USB 0 TEST 5 42 IM WT1801 17EN 5 7 FILE Group FILE SAVE Function Queries all file save settings Syntax FILE SAVE FILE SAVE ABORt Function Aborts a file saving operation Syntax FILE SAVE ABORt Example FILE SAVE ABORT FILE SAVE ANAMing Function Sets or queries the auto naming feature for saving files Syntax FILE SAVE ANAMing OFF NUMBering DATE gt FILE SAVE ANAMing Example FILE SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING FILE SAVE ANAMING gt FILE SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING FILE SAVE COMMent Function Sets or queries the comment that will be added to files that are saved Syntax FILE SAVE COMMent lt String gt FILE SAVE COMMent lt String gt Up to 30 characters FILE SAVE COMME
130. TIME gt SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMTTIME 09 00 SYSTem CLOCk TYPE Function Sets or queries the date time setup method Syntax SYSTem CLOCk TYPE MANual SNTP SYSTem CLOCk TYPE Example SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE MANUAL SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE gt SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE MANUAL SYSTem DATE Function Sets or queries the date Syntax SYSTem DATE lt String gt SYSTem DATE String YY MM DD YY year MM month DD day Example SYSTEM DATE 11 01 01 SYSTEM DATE 11 01 01 Description For year enter the last two digits of the year according to the Gregorian calendar SYSTem DFLow FREQuency Function Sets or queries the frequency data display format when a low frequency or no frequency input is applied Syntax SYSTem DFLow FREQuency 0 ERRor SYSTem DFLow FREQuency Example SYSTEM DFLOW FREQUENCY ERROR SYSTEM DFLOW FREQUENCY gt SYSTEM DFLOW FREQUENCY ERROR SYSTem DFLow MOTor Function Sets or queries the motor data display format when no pulse is applied Syntax SYSTem DFLow MOTor 0 ERRor SYSTem DFLow MOTor Example SYSTEM DFLOW MOTOR ERROR SYSTEM DFLOW MOTOR gt SYSTEM DFLOW MOTOR ERROR Description This is only valid on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 SYSTem DPOint Function Sets or queries the type of decimal point that is used when saving various data in ASCII format CSV
131. TOR NUMERIC 1 3 3 DISPlay WAVE 3 Function Queries all waveform display settings S Syntax DISPlay WAVE 9 o DISPlay WAVE ALL S Function Collectively sets the on off status of all waveform i displays a Syntax DISPlay WAVE ALL Boolean n Example DISPLAY WAVE ALL ON DISPlay WAVE FORMat Function Sets or queries the display format of all waveforms Syntax DISPlay WAVE FORMat SINGle DUAL TRIad QUAD HEXa DISPlay WAVE FORMat Example DISPLAY WAVE FORMAT SINGLE DISPLAY WAVE DISPLAY WAVE FORMAT gt FORMAT SINGLE DISPlay WAVE GRATicule B DISPlay VECTor ITEM x OBJect x lor 2 item number XNR SIGMA SIGMB Gl lt Element gt n IGMC lt NRf gt 1 to 6 DISPLAY VECTOR ITEM1 OBJECT SIGMA DISPLAY VECTOR ITEM1 OBJECT gt DISPLAY VECTOR ITEM1 OBJECT SIGMA Example Function Sets or queries the graticule grid type Syntax DISPlay WAVE GRATicule GRID FRAMe CROSshair DISPlay WAVE GRATicule Example DISPLAY WAVE GRATICULE GRID DISPLAY WAVE DISPLAY WAVE GRATICULE gt GRATICULE GRID IM WT1801 17EN 5 35 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay WAVE INTerpolate Function Sets or queries the waveform interpolation method Syntax DISPlay WAVE INTerpolate OFF LINE DISPlay WAVE INTerpolate Example DISPLAY WAVE INTERPOLATE LINE DISPLAY WAVE INTERPOLATE gt DISPLAY WAVE INTERPOLATE LINE
132. U1 gt DISPLAY WAVE VZOOM U1 1 00 Description For details on the available zoom factors see the features guide IM WT1801 01EN Example DISPlay WAVE VZoom UALL IALL Function Collectively sets the vertical zoom factor for the voltage or current waveforms of all elements Syntax DISPlay WAVE VZoom UALL IALL lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 1 to 100 Example DISPLAY WAVE VZOOM UALL 1 Description For details on the available zoom factors see the features guide IM WT1801 01EN IM WT1801 17EN 5 37 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 6 DISPlay Group Function Option List Settings That Can Be Used for lt Function gt 1 Numeric data functions Applicable commands AOUTput NORMal CHANnel x NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt lt String gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix ITEM x NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt Order DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL CURSor Function DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal lt Function gt lt Boolean gt BASure EVENt lt x gt EXPRession ITEM lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt NUMeric NORMal
133. UTO ELEMENT1 gt INPUT CURRENT AUTO ELEMENT1 1 Example Queries all electric current measurement settings INPut CURRent AUTO SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Function Collectively sets the electric current auto range on off status of all the elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C Syntax INPut CURRent AUTO SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Boolean Example INPUT CURRENT AUTO SIGMA ON Description SIGMA SIGMB or SIGMC is invalid if the wiring system setting INPut WIRing is made in such a way that the corresponding wiring unit 2A 2B or 2C does not exist INPut CURRent CONFig Function Queries the valid electric current ranges of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent CONFig INPut CURRent CONFig ALL Function Collectively sets the valid electric current range of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent CONFig ALL ALL Current Current lt Current gt ALL All ranges are valid 50 A input elements When the crest factor is set to 3 Current 1 A 2 A 5A 10A 20 A 50A When the crest factor is set to 6 Current 500 mA 1A 2 5A 5A 10A 25A 5A input elements When the crest factor is set to 3 Current 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA 200 mA 500 mA 14 2A 5A When the crest factor is set to 6 Current 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA 100 mA 250 mA 500 mA 1A 2 5A INPUT CURRENT CONFIG ALL ALL INPUT CURRENT CONFIG ALL
134. UTPUT NORMAL CHANNEL1 gt AOUTPUT NORMAL CHANNEL1 URMS 1 AOUTPUT NORMAL CHANNEL1 UK 1 1 AOUTPUT NORMAL CHANNEL1 gt AOUTPUT NORMAL CHANNEL1 UK 1 1 Description For information about the options available for Function see Function Option List 1 in the DISPlay Group section on page 5 38 f Element is omitted the element is set to 1 f Order is omitted the order is set to TOTal Element and Order are omitted from responses to functions that do not need them AOUTput NORMal1 IRTime Function Sets or queries the integration time that is used in the D A output of the integrated value Syntax AOUTput NORMal IRTime NRf NRf NRf AOUTput NORMal IRTime lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0 0 to 0000 0 0 First NRf 0 to 10000 hours Second lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minutes Third NRf 0 to 59 seconds AOUTPUT NORMAL IRTIME 1 0 0 AOUTPUT NORMAL IRTIME gt AOUTPUT NORMAL IRTIME 1 0 0 Example AOUTput NORMal MODE x Function Sets or queries the rated value setup mode for D A output items Syntax AOUTput NORMal MODE x FIXed MANual AOUTput NORMal MODE lt x gt x 1 to 20 output channel Example AOUTPUT NORMAL MODE1 FIXED AOUTPUT NORMAL MODE1 gt AOUTPUT NORMAL MODE1 FIXED AOUTput NORMal1 RATE lt x gt Function Sets or queries the rated maximum or minimum value for D A output ite
135. VAL16 MATRix ALL SINGle DUAL CUSTom DISPlay NUMeric NORMal FORMat DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL FORMAT VAL4 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL FORMAT DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL FORMAT VAL4 Description The numeric data is displayed in the following ways for each format VALA VAL8 VAL 16 Numeric display items are displayed in order by their item numbers The numbers in these options indicate the number of items that are displayed on a single screen page MATRix Selected functions are displayed in order by element ALL All functions are displayed in order by element SINGle One list display item is listed by separating the data into even and odd harmonic orders DUAL Two list display items are listed in order by harmonic order CUSTom The specified numeric display items are displayed on the specified bitmap background SINGIe and DUAL can only be selected on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option Example DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST Function Queries all numeric display settings in the list display modes Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST Description The list display is only available on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST CURSor Function Sets or queries the cursor position on the numeric display in the list display modes Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST URSor HEADer ORDer DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST
136. WT1800 Precision Power Analyzer Communication Interface USER S MANUAL YOKOGAWA 4 Yokogawa Meters amp Instruments Corporation IM WT1801 17EN 2nd Edition Notes Thank you for purchasing the WT1800 Precision Power Analyzer This Communication Interface User s Manual explains the following interface features and commands Ethernet interface USBinterface GP IB interface To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before operation Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises The following manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the WT1800 Please read all the manuals Manual Title Manual No Description WT1800 Precision Power Analyzer IM WT1801 01EN The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this Features Guide manual This manual explains all the WT1800 features other than the communication interface features WT1800 Precision Power Analyzer IM WT1801 02EN The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this User s Manual manual The manual explains how to operate the WT1800 WT1800 Precision Power Analyzer IM WT1801 03EN The manual explains the handling precautions and Getting Started Guide basic operations of the WT1800 and provides an overview of its features WT1800 Precision Power Analyzer IM WT1801 17EN This manual The supplied CD contains the PDF Communication Interface file of this manual This manual explains the User s M
137. a values 4 6 and chapter 5 109 Missing parameter Be sure to include all necessary data values 4 6 and chapter 5 111 Header separator error Use a comma to separate each header from its data 4 1 112 Program mnemonic too long Check the length of the mnemonic alphanumeric Chapter 5 character string 113 Undefined header Check the header Chapter 5 114 Header suffix out of range Check the header Chapter 5 120 Numeric data error A value must be specified where the syntax contains 4 6 lt NRf gt 123 Exponent too large Where the syntax contains lt NR3 gt make the exponent 4 6 and that follows E smaller chapter 5 124 Too many digits Limit numeric values to 255 digits or less 4 6 and chapter 5 128 Numeric data not allowed Use a data type other than lt NRf gt 4 6 and chapter 5 131 Invalid suffix Check the units where the syntax contains Voltage 4 6 Current Time or lt Frequency gt 134 Suffix too long Check the units where the syntax contains Voltage 4 6 Current Time or lt Frequency gt 138 Suffix not allowed Units of measurement can only be used where the 4 6 syntax contains Voltage Current Time or lt Frequency gt 141 Invalid character data Be sure to select one of the listed choices when the Chapters 4 syntax contains and 5 144 Character data too long Check the spelling of the strings when the syntax Chapter 5 contains 148 Character data not a
138. al input type MOTor TORQue TYPE is set to ANALog analog input MOTor TORQue LSCale Function Queries all torque signal analog input type linear scaling settings Syntax MOTor TORQue LSCale Description Linear scaling settings are valid when the torque signal input type MOTor TORQue TYPE is set to ANALog analog input MOTor TORQue LSCale AVALue Function Sets or queries the slope A of the linear scale of the torque signal analog input type Syntax MOTor TORQue LSCale AVALue lt NRf gt MOTor TORQue LSCale AVALue lt NR gt 1 000E 03 to 1 000E 06 Example MOTOR TORQUE LSCALE AVALUE 1 000 MOTOR TORQUE LSCALE AVALUE gt MOTOR TORQUE LSCALE AVALUE 1 000E 00 MOTor TORQue LSCale BVALue Function Sets or queries the offset B of the linear scale of the torque signal analog input type Syntax MOTor TORQue LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt MOTor TORQue LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt 1 000E 06 to 1 000E 06 Example MOTOR TORQUE LSCALE BVALUE 0 MOTOR TORQUE LSCALE BVALUE gt MOTOR TORQUE LSCALE BVALUE 0 000E 00 MOTor TORQue LSCale CALCulate MOTor TORQue LSCale CALCulate P1X P1Y P2X P2Y Function Sets or queries the data Point1X Point1Y Point2X or Point2Y for parameter calculations of the linear scale of the torque signal analog input type Syntax MOTor TORQue LSCale CALCulate P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt NRf gt MOTor TORQue LSCale C
139. and can be used to select whether to return the response in the full form or in the abbreviated form e The COMMunicate HEADer setting does not affect character data Boolean Boolean is data that indicates ON or OFF The following types of expressions are possible Form Example ON OFF NR ON OFF 1 0 When Boolean is expressed in the NRf form OFF is selected if the rounded integer value is 0 and ON is selected for all other cases Aresponse message is always returned with a 1 if the value is ON and with a 0 if the value is OFF String Data String data is not a predefined character string like character data It can be any character string The character string must be enclosed in single quotation marks or double quotation marks Form Example String data ABC IEEE488 2 1992 Ifa character string contains a double quotation mark the double quotation mark is expressed as two consecutive quotation marks This rule also applies to single quotation marks Aresponse message is always enclosed in double quotation marks String data is any character string Therefore the instrument assumes that the remaining program message units are part of the character string if no closing single or double quotation mark is encountered As a result no error is detected if a quotation mark is omitted Block Data Block da
140. anual WT1800 communication interface features and how to use them The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functionality The figures given in this manual may differ from those that actually appear on your screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of YOKOGAWA is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the documents concerning it have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from the Regents of the University of California Trademarks Revisions Microsoft Internet Explorer MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe and Acrobat are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated nthis manual the amp and TM symbols do not accompany their respective registered trademark or trademark names Other company and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders e 1st Edition February 2011 2
141. ar Clears high speed data capturing mode numeric list data output items sets 5 80 the items to NONE NUMeric HSPeed DELete Deletes high speed data capturing mode numeric list data output items 5 80 NUMeric HSPeed HEADer Queries the header of the numeric data of high speed data capturing mode 5 81 NUMeric HSPeed ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the output item function and element of the specified high 5 81 speed data capturing mode numeric data item NUMeric HSPeed Queries the maximum or minimum value of the numeric data of high speed 5 81 MAXimum MINimum data capturing mode NUMeric HSPeed NUMber Sets or queries the number of numeric data items that are transmitted by the 5 81 NUMeric HSPeed VALue command NUMeric HSPeed PRESet Presets the numeric data output item pattern of the high speed data 5 82 capturing mode NUMeric HSPeed VALue Queries the numeric data of high speed data capturing mode 5 82 NUMeric HOLD Sets or queries the on off hold release status of the numeric data hold 5 83 feature NUMeric LIST Queries all harmonic measurement numeric list data output settings 5 83 NUMeric LIST CLEar Clears harmonic measurement numeric list data output items sets the items 5 83 to NONE NUMeric LIST DELete Deletes harmonic measurement numeric list data output items 5 83 NUMeric LIST ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the output item function and element of the specified 5 84 harmonic measurement numeric li
142. ata Syntax HOLD lt Boolean gt HOLD Example HOLD OFF HOLD HOLD 0 5 48 IM WT1801 17EN 5 11 HSPeed Group The commands in this group deal with the high speed data capturing feature These commands allow you to enter and query the same settings that are available under ITEM in the HS Items menu and under FORM in the HS Settings menu on the front panel The commands in this group are only valid on models with the high speed data capturing HS option HSPeed Function Queries all high speed data capturing feature settings Syntax HSPeed Description The commands in this group are only valid on models with the high speed data capturing HS option HSPeed CAPTured Function Queries the number of captures that have been performed in high speed data capturing Syntax HSPeed CAPTured Example HSPEED CAPTURED gt 200 Description Returns the number displayed next to Captured in the status display at the top of the screen during capturing HSPeed COUNt Function Sets or queries the number of data captures Syntax HSPeed COUNt NRf INFinite HSPeed COUNCt NRf 1 to 10000000 INFinite No limit Example HSPEED COUNT INFINITE HSPEED COUNT gt HSPEED COUNT INFINITE HSPeed DISPlay Function Queries all display settings of high speed data capturing mode Syntax HSPeed DISPlay Description The HSPeed DISPlay commands perform th
143. ath of the directory that files are loaded from or saved to for the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE PATH DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE PATH USB 0 CUSTOM Example DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE SAVE ANAMing Function Sets or queries the automatic file name generation feature for saving display configuration files of the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE SAVE ANAMing OFF NUMBering DATE DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE SAVE ANAMing Example DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE SAVE ANAMING gt DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE SAVE ITEM Function Saves the specified display configuration file for the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE SAVE ITEM String String File name DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE SAVE ITEM CUSTOM1 Description Specify the file name without its extension txt Example This command is an overlap command DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM x Function Queries all the settings of the specified display item of the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM lt x gt x 1 to 192 item number 5 26 IM WT1801 17EN 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay
144. c display in the list display 5 30 CURSor modes DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST Sets or queries the cursor position of the header section on the numeric 5 30 HEADer display in the list display modes DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST Sets or queries the specified display item function and element on the 5 30 ITEM lt x gt numeric display in the list display modes DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST Sets or queries the harmonic order cursor position of the data section on the 5 31 ORDer numeric display in the list display modes DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Queries all numeric display settings in matrix display mode 5 31 MATRix DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Queries all column settings of the numeric display in matrix display mode 5 31 MATRix COLumn DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the specified column display item of the numeric display in 5 31 MATRix COLumn ITEM x matrix display mode IM WT1801 17EN 5 3 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the number of columns of the numeric display in matrix 5 31 MATRix COLumn NUMber display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Resets the column display items to their default values on the numeric 5 31 MATRix COLumn RESet display in matrix display mo
145. capturing mode Syntax DISPlay HSPeed COLumn DISPlay HSPeed COLumn ITEM lt x gt Function Sets or queries the specified column display item of the high speed data capturing mode Syntax DISPlay HSPeed COLumn ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Element gt DISPlay HSPeed COLumn ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 column number Element NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt NRf gt 1 to 6 Example DISPLAY HSPEED COLUMN ITEM1 1 SPLAY HSPEED COLUMN ITEM1 gt DISPLAY HSPEED COLUMN ITEM1 1 Ivi DISPlay HSPeed COLumn NUMber Function Sets or queries the number of columns of the high speed data capturing mode Syntax DISPlay HSPeed COLumn NUMber lt NRf gt DISPlay HSPeed COLumn NUMber lt NRf gt 4 6 Example DISPLAY HSPEED COLUMN NUMBER 4 DISPLAY HSPEED COLUMN NUMBER gt DISPLAY HSPEED COLUMN NUMBER 4 DISPlay HSPeed COLumn RESet Function Resets the column display items to their default values on the high speed data capturing mode Syntax DISPlay HSPeed COLumn RESet Example DISPLAY HSPEED COLUMN RESET DISPlay HSPeed FRAMe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the high speed data capturing mode s data section frame Syntax DISPlay HSPeed FRAMe lt Boolean gt DISPlay HSPeed FRAMe Example DISPLAY HSPEED FRAME ON DISPLAY HSPEED FRAME gt DISPLAY HSPEED FRAME 1 Description This command performs the same setting as the DISPlay NUMeric FRA
146. cate HEADer Boolean COMMunicate HEADer COMMUNICATE HEADER ON COMMUNICATE HEADER gt COMMUNICATE HEADER 1 Example COMMunicate LOCKout Function Sets or clears local lockout Syntax COMMunicate LOCKout lt Boolean gt COMMunicate LOCKout COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT ON COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT gt COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT 1 Example COMMunicate OPSE Function Sets or queries the overlap command that is used by the OPC OPC and WAI commands Syntax COMMunicate OPSE Register COMMunicate OPSE lt Register gt 0 to 65535 See the figure for the COMMunicate OPSR command Example COMMUNICATE OPSE 65535 COMMUNICATE OPSE gt COMMUNICATE OPSE 96 Description In the above example all bits are set to 1 to make all overlap commands applicable However bits fixed to 0 are not set to 1 so the response to the query only indicates 1 for bits 5 and 6 COMMunicate OPSR Function Queries the operation pending status register Syntax COMMunicate OPSR Example COMMunicate OPSR gt 0 Description Operation pending status register and overlap enable register 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 0 0 ACSPRNIO 0 On oo o When bit 5 PRN 1 Built in printer operation is incomplete When bit 6 ACS 1 Storage media access is incomplete COMMunicate OVERlap Function Sets or queries the
147. ccording to the wiring system setting element z DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL COLumn SCRo11 Function Sets or queries the on off status of column scrolling of the numeric display in All Items display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL COLumn SCRoll lt NRf gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL COLumn SCRol11 lt NRf gt 0 to 3 scroll amount Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL COLUMN SCROLL 0 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL COLUMN SCROLL gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL COLUMN SCROLL 0 Description This command is valid when the column display all feature DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL COLumn DAELem is set to OFF DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL CURSor Function Sets or queries the cursor position on the numeric display in All Items display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL URSor Function DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL CURSor Function URMS IRMS P S Q DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL CURSOR P DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL CURSOR gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL CURSOR P Description Use the function name to specify the cursor position For information about the options available for Function see Function Option List 1 on page 5 38 Example DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL ORDer Function Sets or queries the displayed harmonic order on the harmonic measurement function display page of the numeric display in All It
148. commands that operate as overlap commands Syntax COMMunicate OVERlap Register COMMunicate OVERlap Register 0 to 65535 See the figure for the COMMunicate OPSR command Example COMMUNICATE OVERLAP 65535 COMMUNICATE OVERLAP gt COMMUNICATE OVERLAP 96 Description In the above example all bits are set to 1 to make all overlap commands applicable However bits fixed to O are not set to 1 so the response to the query only indicates 1 for bits 5 and 6 For information about how to synchronize a program using COMMunicate OVERIap see page 4 8 n the above example bits 5 and 6 are set to 1 to make all overlap commands applicable see the figure for the COMMunicate OPSR command IM WT1801 17EN 5 19 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 4 COMMunicate Group COMMunicate REMote Function Sets the WT1800 to remote or local mode On is remote mode Syntax COMMunicate REMote Boolean COMMunicate REMote Example COMMUNICATE REMOTE ON COMMUNICATE REMOTE gt COMMUNICATE REMOTE 1 COMMunicate VERBose Function Sets or queries whether the response to a query is returned fully spelled out example INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE ELEMENT1 1 000E 03 or in its abbreviated form example VOLT RANG ELEM 1 000E 03 Syntax COMMunicate VERBose lt Boolean gt COMMunicate VERBose Example COMMUNICATE VERBOSE ON COMMUNICATE VERBOSE gt COMMUNICATE VERBOSE 1
149. cription ESE Function Syntax Example Description Executes zero calibration zero level compensation the same operation as pressing CAL SHIFT SINGLE and queries the result CAL CAL gt 0 If the calibration ends normally 0 is returned If an error is detected 1 is returned Clears the standard event register extended event register and error queue CLS CLS If the CLS command is located immediately after the program message terminator the output queue is also cleared For information about each register and queue see chapter 6 Sets or queries the standard event enable register ESE lt NRf gt ESE lt NRf gt ESE 251 ESE 251 0 to 255 Specify the value as a sum of the values of each bit in decimal format For example specifying ESE 251 will cause the standard enable register to be set to 11111011 In this case bit 2 of the standard event register is disabled This means that bit 5 ESB of the status byte register is not set to 1 even if a query error occurs The default value is ESE 0 all bits disabled Aquery using ESE will not clear the contents of the standard event enable register For information about the standard event enable register see page 6 4 ESR Function Syntax Example Description IDN Function Syntax Example Description OPC Function Syntax Example Description Queries and clears the standard event r
150. ction Option List 1 in the DISPlay Group section on page 5 38 IM WT1801 17EN 5 43 5 7 FILE Group FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMa1 PRESet lt x gt Function Presets the output on off pattern of the element functions to be used when numeric data is saved to a file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal PRESet lt x gt lt x gt 1 or 2 preset number Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL PRESET1 Description For details on the output setting patterns that result when the pattern is reset see the features guide IM WT1801 01EN FILE SAVE SETup EXECute Function Saves setup parameters to a file Syntax FILE SAVE SETup EXECute lt String gt lt String gt File name Example FILE SAVE SETUP EXECUTE SETUP1 Description Specify the file name without an extension This command is an overlap command FILE SAVE WAVE EXECute Function Saves waveform display data to a file Syntax FILE SAVE WAVE EXECute lt String gt lt String gt File name Example FILE SAVE WAVE EXECUTE WAVE1 Description Specify the file name without an extension This command is an overlap command 5 44 IM WT1801 17EN 5 8 HARMonics Group The commands in this group deal with harmonic measurement You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing HRM SET on the front panel The commands in this group are only valid on models with the simultaneous dual harmonic measurement G6
151. cutoff frequency Example MOTOR FILTER LINE OFF MOTOR FILTER LINE MOTOR FILTER LINE OFF MOTor PM Function Queries all motor output Pm settings Syntax MOTor PM IM WT1801 17EN 5 75 5 16 MOTor Group MOTor PM SCALing Function Sets or queries the motor output computation scaling factor Syntax MOTor PM SCALing lt NRf gt MOTor PM SCALing NRf 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example MOTOR PM SCALING 1 MOTOR PM SCALING gt MOTOR PM SCALING 1 0000 MOTor PM UNIT Function Sets or queries the unit that is added to the motor output computation result Syntax MOTor PM UNIT String MOTor PM UNIT String Up to 8 characters MOTOR PM UNIT W MOTOR PM UNIT gt MOTOR PM UNIT W Description This command has no effect on the computation Example result MOTor POLE Function Sets or queries the motor s number of poles Syntax MOTor POLE NRf MOTor POLE lt NRf gt 1 to 99 Example MOTOR POLE 2 MOTOR POLE gt MOTOR POLE 2 MOTor SPEed Function Queries all rotating speed Speed settings Syntax MOTor SPEed MOTor SPEed AUTO Function Sets or queries the voltage auto range on off status of the revolution signal analog input type Syntax MOTor SPEed AUTO lt Boolean gt MOTor SPEed AUTO MOTOR SPEED AUTO ON MOTOR SPEED AUTO MOTOR SPEED AUTO 1 Description This command is valid when the revolution signal i
152. d always 0 Bit5 CME Command Error This bit is set to 1 when there is a command syntax error Examples Command names are misspelled or character data that is not one of the available options has been received Bit4 EXE Execution Error This bit is set to 1 when the command syntax is correct but the command cannot be executed in the current state Examples Parameters are out of range or a command has been received for an option that is not installed Bit 3 DDE Device Error This bit is set to 1 when a command cannot be executed for internal reasons other than a command syntax error or command execution error Bit 2 QYE Query Error This bit is set to 1 when a query command is received but the output queue is empty or the data is lost Examples There is no response data or data is lost due to an overflow in the output queue e Bit 1 RQC Request Control Not used always 0 e Bit 0 OPC Operation Complete This bit is set to 1 upon the completion of the operation designated by the OPC command see chapter 5 for details Bit Masking To mask a certain bit of the standard event register so that it does not cause bit 5 ESB in the status byte to change set the corresponding bit of the standard event enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 QYE so that ESB will not be set to 1 even if a query error occurs set bit 2 of the standard event enable register to O Do this using the ESE comma
153. d 399 Code Message Corrective Action Page 300 Communication device specific error Servicing required 399 Fatal error in the communication driver Servicing required Communication Warning 50 Code Message Corrective Action Page 50 OPC exists in message Write OPC or OPC at the end of program messages Other Error 350 Code Message Corrective Action Page 350 Queue overflow Read the error queue 6 6 Note Code 350 occurs when the error queue overflows This error is only returned in response to a STATus ERRor query it is never displayed on the screen IM WT1801 17EN App 3 xipueddy H Appendix 2 About the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard The WT1800 s GP IB interface conforms to the IEEE 488 2 1992 standard This standard specifies that the following 23 items be stated in the document This section describes these items 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Of the IEEE 488 1 interface features the subsets that are supported See section 3 2 GP IB Interface Features and Specifications The operation of the device when it is assigned an address outside the 0 to 30 range The address of this instrument cannot be set to an address outside the 0 to 30 range Reaction of the device when the user changes the address The address change is detected when the user presses UTILITY and then the Remote Ctrl soft key and changes the address The new addre
154. d Power equation parameter 5 74 MEASure PHASe Sets or queries the display format of the phase difference 5 74 MEASure SAMPling Sets or queries the sampling frequency 5 74 MEASure SFORmula Sets or queries the equation used to compute S apparent power 5 74 MEASure SQFormula Sets or queries the equation used to compute S apparent power and Q 5 74 reactive power MEASure SYNChronize Sets or queries the synchronized measurement mode 5 74 MOTor Group MOTor Queries all motor evaluation function settings 5 75 MOTor EANG1e Queries all electrical angle measurement settings 5 75 MOTor EANGle CORRection Queries all electrical angle correction settings 5 75 MOTor EANGle CORRection Queries all automatic electrical angle correction entry settings 5 75 AENTer MOTor EANGle CORRection Executes an automatic electrical angle correction entry 5 75 AENTer EXECute MOTor EANGle CORRection Sets or queries the target source for automatically entering the electrical 5 75 AENTer TARGet angle correction value MOTor EANGle CORRection CLEar Clears the electrical angle correction value 5 75 MOTor EANGle Sets or queries the electrical angle correction value 5 75 CORRection VALue MOTor EANGle STATe Sets or queries the on off status of electrical angle measurement 5 75 MOTor FILTer Queries all input filter settings 5 75 MOTor FILTer LINE Sets or queries the line filter 5 75 MOTor PM Queries all motor output Pm settings
155. d function s output when 5 95 Function numeric data is stored IM WT1801 17EN spueululo2 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page STORe NUMeric NORMal Presets the output on off pattern of the element functions to be used when 5 96 PRESet x numeric data is stored STORe RESet Resets the numeric data storage feature 5 96 STORe RTIMe Queries the storage start and end times for real time storage mode 5 96 STORe RTIMe STARt END Sets or queries the storage start or end time for real time storage mode 5 96 STORe SASTart Sets or queries whether numeric data is stored when storage starts 5 96 STORe SMODe Sets or queries the storage mode 5 96 STORe STARt Begins the storing of numeric data 5 96 STORe STATe Sets or queries the storage state 5 96 STORe STOP Stops the storing of numeric data 5 96 STORe TEVent Sets or queries the event that the event synchronized storage mode will 5 96 trigger on SYSTem Group SYSTem Queries all system settings 5 97 SYSTem CLOCk Queries all date time settings 5 97 SYSTem CLOCk DISPlay Sets or queries the on off status of the date time display 5 97 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP Queries all settings related to using SNTP to set the date and time 5 97 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Uses SNTP to set the date
156. d sets the cutoff frequency You can set the frequency between 0 1 kHz and 100 0 kHz with a resolution of 0 1 KHz Frequency O0 Example tz HSPeed MAXCount Function Sets or queries the maximum number of data captures Syntax HSPeed MAXCount Example HSPEED MAXCOUNT gt 506811 HSPeed MEASuring Function Queries all high speed data capturing voltage mode or current mode settings Syntax HSPeed MEASuring HSPeed MEASuring ALL Function Sets all voltage and current modes at the same time Syntax HSPeed MEASuring ALL RMS MEAN DC RMEAN Example HSPEED MEASURING ALL RMS 5 50 IM WT1801 17EN 5 11 HSPeed Group HSPeed MEASuring U lt x gt I lt x gt Function Sets or queries the specified voltage or current mode Syntax HSPeed MEASuring U lt x gt I lt x gt RMS MEAN DC RMEAN HSPeed MEASuring U lt x gt I lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element HSPEED MEASURING U1 RMS HSPEED MEASURING U1 gt HSPEED MEASURING U1 RMS Example HSPeed MEASuring UALL IALL Function Sets all voltage or current modes at the same time Syntax HSPeed MEASuring UALL IALL RMS MEAN DC RMEAN Example HSPEED MEASURING UALL RMS HSPeed POVer Function Queries the high speed data capturing peak over range information Syntax HSPeed POVer HSPEED POVER gt 0 Description Returns the peak over range information the Peak Over
157. de DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the cursor position on the numeric display in matrix display 5 31 MATRix CURSor mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the specified display item function and harmonic order on 5 32 MATRix ITEM lt x gt the numeric display in matrix display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the displayed page of the numeric display in matrix display 5 32 MATRix PAGE mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Presets the display order pattern of displayed items on the numeric display 5 32 MATRix PRESet in matrix display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Queries all numeric display settings in 4 Items 8 Items or 16 Items display 5 32 VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the cursor position on the numeric display in 4 Items 8 5 32 VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 CURSor Items or 16 Items display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the function element and harmonic order of the specified 5 33 VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 ITEM lt x gt numeric display item in 4 Items 8 Items or 16 Items display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the displayed page of the numeric display in 4 Items 8 Items 5 33 VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PAGE or 16 Items display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMa Presets the display order pattern of displayed items on the numeric display 5 33 VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PRESet in 4 Items 8 Items or 16 Items display mode DISPlay TRENd Quer
158. e STB query Bit 6 functions as MSS when a query is made using STB This causes the MSS to be read This query does not cause any of the status byte bits to be cleared after the status byte is read Serial polling Bit 6 functions as RQS when serial polling is issued This causes the RQS to be read After the status byte is read only the RQS bit is cleared You cannot read the MSS bit when serial polling is used Clearing the Status Byte There is no way to clear all the bits in the status byte The bits that are cleared for each operation are shown below STB query None of the bits are cleared Serial polling Only the RQS bit is cleared e When a CLS command is received When a CLS command is received the status byte itself is not cleared but the contents of the standard event register which affect the bits in the status byte are cleared As a result the corresponding status byte bits are cleared Because the output queue is not cleared with a CLS command bit 4 MAV in the status byte is not affected However the output queue will be cleared if the CLS command is received just after a program message terminator IM WT1801 17EN syodey snjejs Hu 6 3 Standard Event Register Standard Event Register 7l6 5 4 3 2 11 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Bit 7 PON Power ON This bit is set to 1 when the instrument is turned on Bit 6 URQ User Request Not use
159. e integration mode RNORmal or RCONtinuous When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to OFF 0 you can omit x lt x gt 1 The operation is performed on all elements using element 1 s integration start or end time INTEGrate STARt Function Syntax Example Description Starts integration INTEGrate STARt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt L lt NRf gt NR NR NR lt NRf gt 1 to 6 element INTEGRATE START starts integration on all elements INTEGRATE START 1 2 3 starts integration on the specified elements When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to ON 1 you can use the parameters to specify which elements to perform the operation on If you omit the parameters the operation will be performed on all the elements When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to OFF 0 you cannot use the parameters to specify elements INTEGrate STATe Function Syntax Example Description Queries the integration status INTEGrate STATe lt NRf gt INTEGrate STATe lt NRf gt to 6 element When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to OFF 0 INTEGRATE STATE RESET When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to ON 1 INTEGRATE STATE 1 RESET INTEGRATE STATE gt RESET RESET RE
160. e ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the watt hour integration method for each polarity WP WP of the specified element Syntax INTEGrate WPTYpe ELEMent lt x gt CHARge SOLD INTEGrate WPTYpe ELEMent x x 1 to 6 element CHARge Charge discharge SOLD Commercial power Example INTEGRATE WPTYPE ELEMENT1 CHARGE INTEGRATE WPTYPE ELEMENT1 gt INTEGRATE WPTYPE ELEMENT1 CHARGE Description Regardless of the independent element integration setting INTEGrate INDependent the WT1800 operates according to the integration method of the specified element IM WT1801 17EN 5 69 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 15 MEASure Group The commands in this group deal with computation You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing MEASURE FREQ MEASURE SHIFT MEASURE and AVG on the front panel or by pressing WIRING on the front panel and then using the n Formula or A Measure DT option menu MEASure Function Queries all computation settings Syntax MEASure MEASure AVERaging Function Queries all averaging settings Syntax MEASure AVERaging MEASure AVERaging COUNt Function Sets or queries the averaging coefficient Syntax MEASure AVERaging COUNt lt NRf gt MEASure AVERaging COUNt NRf gt 2 to 64 attenuation constant hen TYPE EXPonent NRf gt 8 to 64 moving average ount when TYPE LINear Example MEASURE AVERAGING COUNT 2 M
161. e line filter is on cutoff frequency Example INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY ALL OFF INPut FILTer FREQuency ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the frequency filter of the specified element Syntax INPut FILTer FREQuency LEMent x OFF lt Frequency gt INPut FILTer FREQuency LEMent x 1 to 6 element 1 Fa Frequency filter off Frequency 100 Hz 1 kHz when the FA OA Ana wo ToX V ine filter is on cutoff frequency Example INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY ELEMENT1 100HZ NPUT FILTER FREQUENCY ELEMENT1 gt NPUT FILTER FREQUENCY ELEMENT1 100 0E 00 INPut FILTer LINE Function Queries the line filters of all elements OFF Line filter off lt Frequency gt 0 1 kHz to 100 0 kHz 300 kHz 1 MHz when the line filter Oo Syntax INPut FILTer LINE 3 INPut FILTer LINE ALL 3 Function Collectively sets the line filter of all elements S Syntax INPut FILTer LINE ALL OFF S lt Frequency gt O o 3 3 D 2 2 a is on cutoff frequency Example INPUT FILTER LINE ALL OFF Description You can set the frequency between 0 1 kHz and 100 0 kHz with a resolution of 0 1 kHz INPut FILTer LINE ELEMent x Function Sets or queries the line filter of the specified element Syntax INPut FILTer LINE ELEMent lt x gt OFF lt Frequency gt INPut FILTer LINE ELEMent x x 1 to 6 element OFF Line filter o
162. e CORRection AENTer TARGet U lt x gt I lt x gt MOTor EANGle CORRection AENTer TARGet x 1 to 6 element Example MOTOR EANGLE CORRECTION AENTER TARGET U1 MOTOR EANGLE CORRECTION AENTER TARGET MOTOR EANGLE CORRECTION AENTER TARGET U1 MOTor EANGle CORRection CLEar Function Syntax Example Clears the electrical angle correction value MOTor EANGle CORRection CLEar MOTOR EANGLE CORRECTION CLEAR MOTor EANGle CORRection VALue Function Syntax Example MOTor EANGle STATe Sets or queries the electrical angle correction value MOTor EANGle CORRection VALue lt NRf gt MOTor EANGle CORRection VALue lt NR gt 180 00 to 180 00 MOTOR EANGLE CORRECTION VALUE 0 MOTOR EANGLE CORRECTION VALUE gt MOTOR EANGLE CORRECTION VALUE 0 00 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 Function Sets or queries the on off status of electrical angle measurement Syntax MOTor EANGle STATe lt Boolean gt MOTor EANGle STATe Example MOTOR EANGLE STATE ON MOTOR EANGLE STATE gt MOTOR EANGLE STATE 1 MOTor FILTer Function Queries all input filter settings Syntax MOTor FILTer MOTor FILTer LINE Function Sets or queries the line filter Syntax MOTor FILTer LINE OFF lt Frequency gt MOTor FILTer LINE OFF Line filter off lt Frequency gt 100 Hz 1 kHz line filter on
163. e WT1800 screen Reset Items Exec For details on the display pattern that appears when the displayed items are reset see the getting started guide IM WT1801 03EN DISPlay TRENd Function Queries all trend display settings Syntax DISPlay TRENd DISPlay TRENd ALL Function Collectively sets the on off status of all trends Syntax DISPlay TRENd ALL Boolean Example DISPLAY TREND ALL ON IM WT1801 17EN 5 33 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay TRENd CLEar Function Clears all trends Syntax DISPlay TRENd CLEar Example DISPLAY TREND CLEAR DISPlay TRENd FORMat Function Sets or queries the display format of all trends Syntax DISPlay TRENd FORMat SINGle DUAL TRIad QUAD DISPlay TRENd FORMat Example DISPLAY TREND FORMAT SINGLE DISPLAY TREND FORMAT gt DISPLAY TREND FORMAT SINGLE DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt Function Queries all settings for the specified trend Syntax DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt x 1 to 16 item number DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion Function Sets or queries the function element and harmonic order of the specified trend item Syntax DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion lt x gt 1 to 16 item number Function URMS IRMS P S Q Element NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt NRf gt to 6 Order TOTal DC NRf lt N
164. e cursors Y x Y axis value of the cursor position Yl Y Y2 Yx DY Y axis difference DY between the cursors Example CURSOR WAVE Y1 gt 78 628E 00 Description If the waveform cursor display is not turned on NAN Not A Number is returned 5 22 IM WT1801 17EN 5 6 DISPlay Group The commands in this group deal with the display You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing the keys in the front panel DISPLAY and ITEM amp ELEMENT areas DISPlay Function Queries all display settings Syntax DISPlay Description Returns all settings that correspond to the current display mode DISPlay MODE DISPlay BAR Function Queries all bar graph display settings Syntax DISPlay BAR Description The bar graph display is only available on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option DISPlay BAR FORMat Function Sets or queries the bar graph display format Syntax DISPlay BAR FORMat SINGle DUAL TRIad DISPlay BAR FORMat Example DISPLAY BAR FORMAT SINGLE DISPLAY BAR FORMAT gt DISPLAY BAR FORMAT SINGLE DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt Function Queries all the display settings of the specified bar graph Syntax DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 3 item number DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion Function Sets or queries the function and element of the specified bar graph item Syntax DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt
165. e same settings and queries as the DISPlay HSPeed commands HSPeed DISPlay COLumn Function Queries all column settings of high speed data capturing mode Syntax HSPeed DISPlay COLumn HSPeed DISPlay COLumn ITEM lt x gt Function Sets or queries a column display item of high speed data capturing mode Syntax HSPeed DISPlay COLumn ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Element gt HSPeed DISPlay COLumn ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 column number lt Element gt NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt NRf gt 1 to 6 Example HSPEED DISPLAY COLUMN ITEM1 1 HSPEED DISPLAY COLUMN ITEM1 gt HSPEED DISPLAY COLUMN ITEMI1 1 HSPeed DISPlay COLumn NUMber Function Sets or queries the number of display columns of high speed data capturing mode Syntax HSPeed DISPlay COLumn NUMber lt NR gt HSPeed DISPlay COLumn NUMber lt NRf gt 4 or 6 Example HSPEED DISPLAY COLUMN NUMBER 4 HSPEED DISPLAY COLUMN NUMBER gt HSPEED DISPLAY COLUMN NUMBER 4 HSPeed DISPlay COLumn RESet Function Resets the column display items of high speed data capturing mode to their default values Syntax HSPeed DISPlay COLumn RESet Example HSPEED DISPLAY COLUMN RESET HSPeed DISPlay FRAMe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the display s data section frame in high speed data capturing mode Syntax HSPeed DISPlay FRAMe lt Boolean gt HSPeed DISPlay
166. ect current input Voltage 25 mV 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V 5 V for external current sensor input 5Ainput elements When the crest factor is set to 3 Current 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA 200 mA 500 mA 1A 2A 5 A for direct current input Voltage 50 mV 100 mV 200 mV 500 mV 1V 2V 5 V 10V for external current sensor input When the crest factor is set to 6 Current 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA 100 mA 250 mA 500 mA 1 A 2 5 A for direct current input Voltage 25 mV 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V 5 V for external current sensor input INPUT CURRENT RANGE ALL 50A INPUT CURRENT RANGE ALL EXTERNAL 10V Description EXTernal and lt Voltage gt can only be selected on models with the external current sensor input EX option Example INPut CURRent RANGe ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the electric current range of the specified element Syntax INPut CURRent RANGe ELEMent lt x gt lt Current gt EXTernal lt Voltage gt INPut CURRent RANGe ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element lt Current gt lt Voltage gt See INPut CURRent RANGe ALL Example INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 50A INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 50 0E 00 INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 EXTERNAL 10V INPUT CURRENT RANGE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT CURRENT RANGE E
167. ed TRIGger SLOPe Sets or queries the trigger slope 5 54 HSPeed TRIGger SOURce Sets or queries the trigger source 5 54 IMAGe Group IMAGe Queries all screen image data output settings 5 55 IMAGe ABORt Aborts a screen image data output operation 5 55 MAGe COLor Sets or queries the color tone of the screen image data that will be saved 5 55 IMAGe COMMent Sets or queries the comment displayed at the bottom of the screen 5 55 MAGe EXECute Executes a screen image data output operation 5 55 IMAGe FORMat Sets or queries the format of the screen image data that will be saved 5 55 MAGe SAVE Queries all screen image data save settings 5 55 IMAGe SAVE ANAMing Sets or queries the auto naming feature for saving files 5 55 IMAGe SAVE CDIRectory Changes the directory that screen image data is saved to 5 55 IMAGe SAVE DRIVe Sets the drive that screen image data is saved to 5 55 IMAGe SAVE FREE Queries the free space in bytes on the drive that the screen image datais 5 55 saved to IMAGe SAVE NAME Sets or queries the name of the file that will be saved 5 56 IMAGe SAVE PATH Queries the absolute path of the directory that the screen image data is 5 56 saved to MAGe SEND Queries the screen image data 5 56 IM WT1801 17EN spueululo2 5 1 List of Commands
168. efault the output items of Pattern 2 are selected NUMeric LIST SELect Function Sets or queries the output components of the harmonic measurement numeric list data Syntax NUMeric LIST SELect EVEN ODD ALL NUMeric LIST SELect NUMERIC LIST SELECT ALL NUMERIC LIST SELECT gt NUMERIC LIST SELECT ALL Description This is only valid on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option The available options are explained below EVEN Outputs the components of TOTal DC and even order harmonics ODD Outputs the components of TOTal DC and odd order harmonics ALL Outputs all components Example 5 84 IM WT1801 17EN 5 17 NUMeric Group NUMeric LIST VALue Function Queries the harmonic measurement numeric list data Syntax NUMeric LIST VALue lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 64 item number Example When lt NRf gt is specified NUMERIC LIST VALUE 1 gt 103 58E 00 0 00E 00 103 53E 00 0 09E 00 2 07E 00 0 04E 00 omitted 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 502 data items max When lt NRf gt is omitted When NUMeric LIST NUMber is set to 5 NUMERIC LIST VALUE 103 58E 00 0 00E 00 103 53E 00 0 09E 00 2 07E 00 0 04E 00 omitted 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 502x5 2510 data items max When NUMeric F ORMat is set to FLOat NUMERIC LIST VALUE N N digit byte number data byte sequence Description This is only valid on models with the harmonic measurement
169. egister ESR ESR 32 Asum of the values of each bit is returned in decimal format When an SRQ is sent you can check what types of events have occurred For example if a value of 32 is returned this indicates that the standard event register is set to 00100000 This means that the SRQ occurred due to a command syntax error A query using ESR will clear the contents of the standard event register For information about the standard event register see page 6 4 Queries the instrument model IDN IDN gt YOKOGAWA WT1806 06 123456789 F1 01 The information is returned in this form Manufacturer Model Serial no gt Firmware version e Model is returned in the following format six digit model code two digit element structure For details on the model code and element structure see Checking the Package Contents in the getting started guide IM WT1801 03EN Sets bit 0 the OPC bit of the standard event register to 1 upon the completion of the specified overlap command OPC OPC For information about how to synchronize a program using OPC see page 4 8 The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command If OPC is not the last command of the message its operation is not guaranteed 5 102 IM WT1801 17EN 5 23 Common Command Group OPC Function Syntax Example Description OPT Function Syntax Example Description
170. el Function Sets or queries the on off status of the waveform labels Syntax DISPlay WAVE TLABel Boolean DISPlay WAVE TLABe1 Example DISPLAY WAVE TLABEL OFF DISPLAY WAVE TLABEL gt DISPLAY WAVE TLABEL 0 5 36 IM WT1801 17EN 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay WAVE TRIGger Function Queries all trigger settings Syntax DISPlay WAVE TRIGger DISPlay WAVE TRIGger LEVel Function Sets or queries the trigger level Syntax DISPlay WAVE TRIGger LEVel lt NRf gt DISPlay WAVE TRIGger LEVel lt NRf gt 100 0 to 100 0 Example DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER LEVEL 0 DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER LEVEL gt DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER LEVEL 0 0 Description Set the value in terms of a percentage of the full scale value displayed on the screen DISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE Function Sets or queries the trigger mode Syntax DISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE AUTO NORMal OFF DISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE Example DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER MODE AUTO DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER MODE gt DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER MODE AUTO DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SLOPe Function Sets or queries the trigger slope Syntax DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SLOPe RISE FALL BOTH DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SLOPe Example DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SLOPE RISE DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SLOPE gt DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SLOPE RISE DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SOURce Function Sets or queries the trigger source Syntax DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SOURce U lt x gt I l
171. element 1 exceeds Data Over its range Bit 9 OVR2 Element2 Measured Set to 1 when the voltage or current of element 2 exceeds Data Over its range Bit 10 OVR3 Element3 Measured Set to 1 when the voltage or current of element 3 exceeds Data Over its range Bit 11 OVR4 Element4 Measured Set to 1 when the voltage or current of element 4 exceeds Data Over its range Bit 12 OVR5 Element5 Measured Set to 1 when the voltage or current of element 5 exceeds Data Over its range Bit 13 OVR6 Element6 Measured Set to 1 when the voltage or current of element 6 exceeds Data Over its range Bit 14 OVRM Motor Measured Set to 1 when the speed or torque of the motor input or Data Over auxiliary input AUX1 or AUX2 exceeds its range Bit 15 POV ElementX Input Peak Set to 1 when a peak over range is detected on any of the Over elements The transition filter parameters detect changes in the specified condition register bits numeric suffixes 1 to 16 and overwrite the extended event register in the following ways RISE The specified extended event register bit is set to 1 when the corresponding condition register bit changes from 0 to 1 FALL The specified extended event register bit is set to 1 when the corresponding condition register bit changes from 1 to 0 BOTH The specified extended event register bit is set to 1 when the corresponding condition register bit changes from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 NEVer Always zero IM WT1801 17EN 6 5 sjioday snjeis BH
172. ems display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL ORDer lt Order gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL ORDer Order TOTal DC lt NRf gt lt NR gt 1 to 500 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL ORDER 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL RDER gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL ORDER 1 Description This is only valid on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option This command is valid when the displayed page number DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL PAGE of the numeric display in All Items display mode is 9 or 10 Example o DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL PAGE Function Sets or queries the displayed page of the numeric display in All Items display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL PAGE lt NR gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL PAGE lt NRf gt 1 to 7 page number lt NRf gt 1 to 8 when the delta computation DT option is installed lt NRf gt 1 to 12 when the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option is installed Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL PAGE 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL PAGE gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL ALL PAGE 1 Description When the page number is set the cursor position moves to the beginning of the page IM WT1801 17EN 5 29 spuewwos uoljesiunwwog 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay NUMeric NORMal FORMat Function Sets or queries the numeric display format Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal FORMat VAL4 VAL8
173. ent lt NRf gt STORe TEVent lt NRf gt 1 to 8 event number Example STORE TEVENT 1 STORE TEVENT gt STORE TEVENT 1 Description This command is valid when the storage mode STORe SMODe is set to EVENt 5 96 IM WT1801 17EN 5 21 SYSTem Group The commands in this group deal with the system You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing UTILITY on the front panel and then using the System Config menu SYSTem Function Queries all system settings Syntax SYSTem SYSTem CLOCk Function Queries all date time settings Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SYSTem CLOCk DISPlay Function Sets or queries the on off status of the date time display Syntax SYSTem CLOCk DISPlay lt Boolean gt SYSTem CLOCk DISPlay Example SYSTEM CLOCK DISPLAY ON SYSTEM CLOCK DISPLAY gt SYSTEM CLOCK DISPLAY 1 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP Function Queries all settings related to using SNTP to set the date and time Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Function Uses SNTP to set the date and time Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Example SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP EXECUTE SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime Function Sets or queries the time difference from Greenwich Mean Time Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime String SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime String HH MM HH hours MM minutes Example SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMTTIME 09 00 SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMT
174. ent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the VT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient of the specified element INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor LEMent x lt NRf gt INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor LEMent lt x gt Syntax x gt 1 to 6 element NRf 0 0001 to 99999 9999 INPUT SCALING VT ELEMENT1 1 INPUT SCALING VT ELEMENT1 gt INPUT SCALING VT ELEMENT1 1 0000 A Ao wa Example IM WT1801 17EN 5 63 5 13 INPut Group INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Function Collectively sets the VT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient of all the elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C Syntax INPut SCALing VT CT SFACtor SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC NRf NRf 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example INPUT SCALING VT SIGMA 1 Description SIGMA SIGMB or SIGMC is invalid if the wiring system setting INPut WIRing is made in such a way that the corresponding wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C does not exist INPut SYNChronize Function Queries the synchronization sources of all elements Syntax INPut SYNChronize INPut SYNChronize ALL Function Collectively sets the synchronization source of all elements Syntax INPut SYNChronize ALL U lt x gt I lt x gt EXTernal NONE lt x gt 1 to 6 element EXTernal External clock input Ext Clk NONE No synchronization source Example INPUT SYNCHRONIZE ALL I INPut
175. ent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC wiring unit ZA 2B or C when numeric data is saved to a file FILE SAVE NUMeric Sets or queries the on off status of the specified function s output when 5 43 NORMal Function numeric data is saved to a file FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Presets the output on off pattern of the element functions to be used when 5 44 PRESet x numeric data is saved to a file FILE SAVE SETup EXECute Saves setup parameters to a file 5 44 FILE SAVE WAVE EXECute Saves waveform display data to a file 5 44 HARMonics Group HARMonics lt x gt Queries all harmonic measurement settings 5 45 HARMonics lt x gt CONFigure Queries the harmonic measurement groups of all elements 5 45 HARMonics lt x gt CONFigure ALL Collectively sets the harmonic measurement group of all elements 5 45 HARMonics lt x gt CONFigure Sets or queries the harmonic measurement group of the specified element 5 45 ELEMent lt x gt HARMonics lt x gt CONFigure Collectively sets the harmonic measurement group of all the elements that 5 45 SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or C HARMonics lt x gt ORDer Sets or queries the maximum and minimum harmonic orders that are 5 45 analyzed HARMonics lt x gt PLLSource Sets or queries the PLL source 5 45 HARMonics lt x gt THD Sets or queries the equation used to compute the THD total harmonic 5 45 distortion IM WT1801 17EN 5 5 5 1 List of Commands
176. equired Not required ETA1 to ETA4 n1 to n4 Not required Not required F1 to F20 F1 to F20 Not required Not required EV1 to EV8 Event1 to Event8 Not required Not required 5 38 IM WT1801 17EN 5 6 DISPlay Group Functions That Require the Harmonic Measurement G5 or G6 Option UK IK PK SK QK LAMBDAK PHIK PHIUk PHIIk Zk RSk XSk RPk XPk UHDFk IHDFk PHDFk UTHD ITHD PTHD UTHF ITHF UTIF ITIF HVF HCF KFACtor PHI U1U2 PHI U1U3 PHI U111 PHI U2I2 PHI US3I3 FPLL1 FPLL2 U k I k P k S k Q k X k k U k l k Z k Rs k Xs k Rp k Xp k Uhdf k Ihdf k Phdf k Uthd Ithd Pthd Uthf Ithf Utif Itif hvf hcf K factor QUi Uj Ui Uk Qui li Uj lj Uj lk fPLL1 fPLL2 Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Not required Not required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not
177. er STATus EESE Register 0 to 65535 STATUS EESE B0000000000000000 STATus EESE gt STATUS EESE 0 Example Description For information about the extended event enable register see chapter 6 Status Reports STATus EESR Function Queries the contents of the extended event register and clears the register Syntax STATus EESR Example STATUS EESR gt 0 Description For information about the extended event register see chapter 6 Status Reports STATus ERRor Function Queries the error code and message of the last error that has occurred top of the error queue Syntax STATus ERRor Example STATUS ERROR gt 113 Underfined Header Description If no error has occurred 0 Noerror is returned You can use the STATus QMESsage command to specify whether the message is included STATus FILTer lt x gt Function Sets or queries the transition filter Syntax STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE FALL BOTH NEVer STATus FILTer lt x gt x 1 to 16 Example STATUS FILTER2 RISE STATus FILTER2 STATUS FILTER2 RISE Description Set how each bit in the condition register must change to trigger the setting of an event If a bit is set to RISE an event is set when the bit changes from 0 to 1 For information about the transition filter see chapter 6 Status Reports STATus QENable Function Sets or queries whether messages other than
178. er calculation settings for the linear scale of the auxiliary input feature Syntax AUX lt x gt LSCale CALCulate lt x gt 1 or 2 AUX input channel AUX lt x gt LSCale CALCulate P1X P1Y P2X P2Y Function Sets or queries the data Point1X Point1Y Point2X or Point2Y for parameter calculations of the linear scale of the auxiliary input feature Syntax AUX x LSCale CALCulate PIX P1Y P2X P2Y lt NRf gt AUX x LSCale CALCulate P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt x gt or 2 AUX input channel lt NR gt 1 000E 12 to 1 000E 12 Example AUX1 LSCALE CALCULATE P1xX 0 AUX1 LSCALE CALCULATE P1X gt AUX1 LSCALE CALCULATE P1X 0 000E 00 IM WT1801 17EN 5 17 5 3 AUX Group AUX lt x gt LSCale CALCulate EXECute Function Syntax Example Calculates parameters for the linear scale of the auxiliary input feature AUX lt x gt LSCale CALCulate EXECute lt x gt 1 or 2 AUX input channel AUX1 LSCALE CALCULATE EXECUTE Description The WT1800 uses the data that has been AUX lt x gt NAME Function Sets or queries the auxiliary input name Syntax AUX lt x gt NAME lt String gt AUX lt x gt NAME lt x gt 1 or 2 AUX input channel lt String gt Up to 8 characters Example AUX1 NAME AUX1 AUX1 NAME gt AUX1 NAME AUX1 AUX lt x gt RANGe Function Sets or queries the auxiliary input voltage range Syntax AUX lt x gt RANGe lt Voltage gt AUX
179. er string When Concatenating Commands Command Groups A command group is a group of commands that have common compound headers arranged in a hierarchy A command group may contain sub groups Example A portion of the commands from the integration command group INTEGrate EGrate MODE TEGrate TIMer EGrate RTIMe TEGrate RTIMe STARt TEGrate RTIMe END TEGrate ACAL TEGrate STARt TEGrate STOP TEGrate RESet HHHHHHHHH J When Concatenating Commands of the Same Group The WT1800 stores the hierarchical level of the command that is currently being executed and processes the next command on the assumption that it belongs to the same level Therefore the common header section can be omitted for commands that belong to the same group Example INTEGrate MODE NORMal ACAL ON lt PMT gt M9IAJ9AQ BuruueJ160Jd gt When Concatenating Commands of Different Groups If the subsequent command does not belong to the same group place a colon in front of the header this colon cannot be omitted Example INTEGrate MODE NORMal DISPlay MODE NUMeric lt PMT gt When Concatenating Simple Headers If a simple header follows another command place a colon in front of the simple header this colon cannot be omitted Example INTEGrate MODE NORMal HOLD ON lt PMT gt When Concatenating Common Commands Common commands that are defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 are independent of hierarch
180. ere ri re e eee eri rr eter E Page auto printing printing at the start of sessssusss 5 40 efficiency siete cepe p teet e Caetera 5 71 auto print operation efficiency equation 5 71 auxiliary input adding a unit electrical angle seseesssssss 5 75 auxiliary input line filter 7 electrical angle automatic offset insertion 5 75 auxiliary Input NaMe ic 3 2 coo rite ree iier electrical angle offset aene tette 5 75 auxiliary input scaling factor 5 roc electric current auto ANJE ssassn 5 57 auxiliary input voltage auto range 5 17 error message App 1 auxiliary input voltage range 5 18 error queue 6 6 averaging rta menn es 5 70 Ethernet interface su 1 2 averaging coefficient 5 70 event synchronized print mode ssssssssssss 5 46 averaging LY PO eeepc re et ege ure De eds 5 70 event synchronized storage mode susssss 5 96 extended event enable register B Page extended event register sess ETT aos oso lan tee external current sensor conversion ratio 5 60 external current sensor range seeeee 5 58 bar graph Scaling method casia ui ES external synchronization signal 5 50 bar graph vertical scale format
181. eric data file 5 42 FILE DELete SETup Deletes the specified setup parameter file 5 42 FILE DELete Deletes the specified stored numeric data file 5 42 STORe DATA HEADer 9 FILE DELete WAVE ASCii Deletes the specified waveform display data file 5 42 3 FILE DRIVe Sets the current drive 5 42 3 FILE FILTer Sets or queries the file list filter 5 42 a F FREE Queries the free space in bytes on the current drive 5 42 o FILE LOAD ABORt Aborts a file loading operation 5 42 FILE LOAD SETup Loads the specified setup parameter file 5 42 FILE PATH Queries the absolute path of the current directory 5 42 FILE SAVE Queries all file save settings 5 43 FILE SAVE ABORt Aborts a file saving operation 5 43 FILE SAVE ANAMing Sets or queries the auto naming feature for saving files 5 43 FILE SAVE COMMent Sets or queries the comment that will be added to files that are saved 5 43 FILE SAVE NUMeric EXECute Saves numeric data to a file 5 43 FILE SAVE NUMeric ITEM Sets or queries the method that is used to select which items are saved 5 43 when numeric data is saved to a file FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Queries all numeric data file save settings for the manual save item 5 43 selection method FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal ALL Collectively sets the on off status of the output of all element functions when 5 43 numeric data is saved to a file FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the on off status of the output of the specified element or 5 43 ELEM
182. eries the number of captures that have been performed in high speed 5 49 data capturing HS Peed COUNt Sets or queries the number of data captures 5 49 HSPeed DISPlay Queries all display settings of high speed data capturing mode 5 49 HSPeed DISPlay COLumn Queries all column settings of high speed data capturing mode 5 49 SPeed Sets or queries a column display item of high speed data capturing mode 5 49 SPeed D DISPlay COLumn ITEM lt x gt DISPlay COLumn NUMber Sets or queries the number of display columns of high speed data capturing 5 49 mode SPeed DISPlay COLumn RESet Resets the column display items of high speed data capturing mode to their 5 49 default values SPeed DISPlay FRAMe Sets or queries the on off status of the display s data section frame in high 5 49 speed data capturing mode HSPeed DISPlay PAGE Sets or queries the display page of high speed data capturing mode 5 50 HS Peed DISPlay POVer Sets or queries the on off status of the display of peak over range information 5 50 in high speed data capturing mode HS Peed EXTSync Sets or queries the on off status of the high speed data capturing s external 5 50 synchronization signal HSPeed FILTer Queries all high speed data capturing filter settings 5 50 HSPeed FILTer HS Sets or queries the high speed data capturing digital filter HS Filter 5 50 H
183. erlap command STORe FILE DRIVe Function Sets the drive that stored numeric data is saved to Syntax STORe FILE DRIVe RAM USB lt NRf gt NETWork RAM Built in RAM drive USB USB memory device drive lt NRf gt 0 or 1 drive number NETWork Network drive Example STORE FILE DRIVE RAM STORe FILE FREE Function Queries the free space in bytes on the drive that the stored numeric data is saved to Syntax STORe FILE FREE Example STORE FILE FREE gt 20912128 5 94 IM WT1801 17EN 5 20 STORe Group STORe FILE NAME Function Sets or queries the name of the file that stored numeric data is saved to Syntax STORe FILE NAME String STORe FILE NAME lt String gt File name Example STORE FILE NAME STORE1 STORE FILE NAME gt STORE FILE NAME STORE1 STORe FILE PATH Function Queries the absolute path of the directory that the stored numeric data is saved to Syntax STORe FILE PATH Example STORE FILE PATH gt USB 0 STORE STORe INTerval Function Sets or queries the storage interval Syntax STORe INTerval NRf NRf NRf STORe INTerval First lt NRf gt 0 to 99 hours Second lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minutes Third lt NRf gt to 59 seconds Example STORE INTERVAL 0 0 0 STORE INTERVAL gt STORE INTERVAL 0 0 0 Description This command is valid when the storage mode STORe SMODe is set to MANual RTIMe or INTEG
184. es of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent EXTSensor CONFig INPut CURRent EXTSensor CONFig ALL Function Collectively sets the valid external current sensor range of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent EXTSensor CONFig ALL ALL lt Voltage gt Voltage Voltage ALL All ranges are valid When the crest factor is set to 3 Voltage 50 mV 100 mV 200 mV 500 mV 1V 2V 5V 10V When the crest factor is set to 6 Voltage 25 mV 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 25V 5V Example INPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR CONFIG ALL ALL INPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR CONFIG ALL 10 5 2 1 Description In the parameters list all the external current sensor ranges that you want to enable To enable all the ranges specify the parameter ALL INPut CURRent EXTSensor CONFig ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the valid external current sensor ranges of the specified element Syntax INPut CURRent EXTSensor CONFig ELEMent lt x gt ALL lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt NPut CURRent EXTSensor CONFig ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element ALL All ranges are valid Voltage gt See INPut CURRent Sensor CONFig ALL Example INPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR CONFIG ELEMENT1 ALL NPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR CONFIG ELEMENT1 gt AA ia NPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR CONFIG ELEMENT1 ALL NPUT CURRENT EXTSENSOR CONFIG E
185. etes numeric data output items NUMeric NORMal DELete lt NRf gt XNRf First NRf 1 to 255 the number of the first item to delete Second lt NRf gt 1 to 255 the number of the last item to delete NUMERIC NORMAL DELETE Deletes ITEM1 and shifts ITEM2 and subsequent items forward NUMERIC NORMAL DELETE 1 3 Deletes ITEM1 to ITEM3 and shifts ITEM4 and subsequent items forward The positions of deleted output items are filled by the items that follow them and empty sections at the end are set to NONE If the second lt NRf gt is omitted only the output item specified by the first lt NRf gt is deleted IM WT1801 17EN 5 85 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 17 NUMeric Group NUMeric NORMal1 ITEM lt x gt Function Sets or queries the specified numeric data output item function element and harmonic order Syntax NUMeric NORMal ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt NUMeric NORMal ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 255 item number NONE No output item Function URMS IRMS PISIQI Element NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt NRf gt 1 to 6 Order TOTal DC NRf lt NR gt 1 to 500 Example NUMERIC NORMAL ITEM1 URMS 1 NUMERIC NORMAL ITEM1 gt NUMERIC NORMAL ITEM1 URMS 1 NUMERIC NORMAL ITEM1 UK 1 1 NUMERIC NORMAL ITEM1 gt NUMERIC NORMAL ITEM1 UK 1 1 Description For information about the opt
186. even when the WT 1800 switches to local mode Note You cannot use the GP IB interface simultaneously with other interfaces USB and Ethernet interfaces IM WT1801 17EN 3 3 e eyieyu grdo B 3 3 Connecting to the GP IB Interface GP IB Cable The WT1800 is equipped with an IEEE St d 488 1978 24 pin GP IB connector Use GP IB cables that comply with IEEE St d 488 1978 Connection Procedure Connect the cable as shown below Notes about Connections Firmly tighten the screws on the GP IB cable connector On the PC end use a GP IB board or card made by National Instruments For details see section 3 2 The WT1800 may not operate properly if the WT1800 is connected to the PC through converters such as a GP IB to USB converter For more details contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Several cables can be used to connect multiple devices However no more than 15 devices including the controller can be connected on a single bus When connecting multiple devices you must assign a unique address to each device Use cables that are 2 m or shorter in length to connect devices Make sure the total length of all cables does not exceed 20 m When devices are communicating have at least two thirds of the devices on the bus turned on To connect multiple devices use a star or daisy chain configuration as shown below Loop and parallel configurations are not allowed
187. f 1 to 6 Order TOTal DC NRf lt NRf gt 1 to 500 When setting a string String Up to 16 characters Example When setting a numeric item 9 DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM 3 FUNCTION URMS 5 DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM S FUNCTION gt Ei DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM 5 FUNCTION URMS S DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM i FUNCTION UK 1 2 DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM n FUNCTION gt DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM FUNCTION UK 1 When setting a string DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM FUNCTION YOKOGAWA DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM FUNCTION gt DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM FUNCTION YOKOGAWA Description Set a numeric item or a string as a display item 1 When setting a numeric item For information about the options available for Function see Function Option List 1 on page 5 38 If Element is omitted the element is set to 1 f Order is omitted the order is set to TOTal Element and lt Order gt are omitted from responses to functions that do not need them 2 When setting a string You can display any string that you want for example the header or unit of a numeric item IM WT1801 17EN 5 27 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM lt x gt POSition Function Sets or queries the display position of the specified display item of t
188. f numeric list data items that are transmitted by NUMeric LIST VALue Syntax NUMeric LIST NUMber lt NRf gt ALL NUMeric LIST NUMber lt NR gt 1 to 64 ALL NUMERIC LIST NUMBER 5 NUMERIC LIST NUMBER gt NUMERIC LIST NUMBER 5 Description This is only valid on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option Ifthe parameter is omitted from the NUMeric LIST VALue command the numeric list data items from 1 to the specified value are output in order By default the number of numeric data items is set to 1 Example NUMeric LIST ORDer Function Sets or queries the maximum output harmonic order of the harmonic measurement numeric list data Syntax NUMeric LIST ORDer lt NRf gt ALL NUMeric LIST ORDer lt NR gt 1 to 500 ALL NUMERIC LIST ORDER 100 NUMERIC LIST ORDER NUMERIC LIST ORDER 100 Description This is only valid on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option Example NUMeric LIST PRESet Function Presets the harmonic measurement numeric list data output item pattern Syntax NUMeric LIST PRESet NRf lt NRf gt 1 to 4 Example NUMERIC LIST PRESET 1 Description This is only valid on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option For information about the output items that are preset see 2 Preset Patterns for Harmonic Measurement Numeric List Data Output Items on page 5 90 at the end of the commands for this group By d
189. ff Frequency 0 1 kHz to 100 0 kHz 300 kHz 1 MHz when the line filter is on cutoff frequency Example INPUT FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 0 5KHZ INPUT FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 gt INPUT FILTER LINE ELEMENT1 500 0E 00 Description You can set the frequency between 0 1 kHz and 100 0 kHz with a resolution of 0 1 kHz IM WT1801 17EN 5 61 5 13 INPut Group INPut FILTer LINE SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Function Collectively sets the line filter of all the elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C Syntax INPut FILTer LINE SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC OFF lt Frequency gt OFF Line filter off lt Frequency gt 0 1 kHz to 100 0 kHz 300 kHz 1 MHz when the line filter is on cutoff frequency Example INPUT FILTER LINE SIGMA 300KHZ Description You can set the frequency between 0 1 kHz and 100 0 kHz with a resolution of 0 1 kHz INPut INDependent Function Sets or queries the on off status of independent input element configuration Syntax INPut INDependent Boolean INPut INDependent INPUT INDEPENDENT OFF INPUT INDEPENDENT INPUT INDEPENDENT 0 Example Description This command is only valid on models with 2 to 6 elements INPut MODUle Function Queries the input element type Syntax INPut MODUle NRf INPut MODU1e lt NRf gt 1 to 6 element INPUT MODULE 1 50 INPUT MODULE 50 50 50 50 50 50 Description The re
190. for a specific event to occur Example STATus FILTerl FALL STATus EESR PMT Read the response to STATus EESR Loop COMMunicate WAIT 1 lt PMT gt NUMeric NORMal VALue PMT M9IAJ9AQ BuruueJ60Jd gt Read the response to NUMeric NORMal VALue STATus EESR PMT Read the response to STATus EESR Return to Loop For a description of STATus FILTerl FALL and STATus EESR see the previous section about the extended event register The COMMunicate WAIT 1 command specifies that the program will wait for bit O in the extended event register to be set to 1 NUMeric NORMal VALue is not executed until bit O in the extended event register becomes 1 IM WT1801 17EN 4 9 Chapter5 Commands 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page AOUTput Group AOUTput Queries all D A output settings 5 16 AOUTput NORMa1 Queries all D A output settings 5 16 AOUTput NORMal CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries a D A output item function element or harmonic order 5 16 AOUTput NORMal IRTime Sets or queries the integration time that is used in the D A output of the 5 16 integrated value AOUTput NORMal MODE lt x gt Sets or queries the rated value setup mode for D A output items 5 16 AOUTput NORMal RATE lt x gt Sets or queries the rated maximu
191. g AUTO CLKA CLKB CLKC MEASure SAMPling MEASURE SAMPLING AUTO MEASURE SAMPLING gt MEASURE SAMPLING AUTO Example Description For details on the available sampling frequencies see the features guide IM WT1801 01EN MEASure SFORmula Function Sets or queries the equation used to compute S apparent power Syntax MEASure SFORmula RMS MEAN DC MRMS RMEAN MEASure SFORmula MEASURE SFORMULA RMS MEASURE SFORMULA gt MEASURE SFORMULA RMS Description The equations that correspond to Example each option are as follows RMS S Urms Irms MEAN S Umean Imean DC S Udc Idoc MRMS S Umean Irms RMEAN S Urmean Irmean MEASure SQFormula Function Sets or queries the equation used to compute S apparent power and Q reactive power Syntax MEASure SQFormula TYPE1 TYPE2 TYPE3 MEASure SQFormula MEASURE SQFORMULA TYPE1 MEASURE SQFORMULA gt MEASURE SQFORMULA TYPE1 Example Description For details on the equations available for TYPE1 TYPE2 or TYPE3 see the features guide IM WT1801 01EN e TYPES3 can only be selected on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option MEASure SYNChronize Function Sets or queries the synchronized measurement mode Syntax MEASure SYNChronize MASTer SLAVe MEASure SYNChronize MEASURE SYNCHRONIZE MASTER MEASURE SYNCHRONIZE gt MEASURE SYNCHRONIZE MASTER Example 5 74 IM WT1801 17EN
192. g SH1 Full source handshaking capability Acceptor handshaking AH1 Full acceptor handshaking capability Talker T6 Basic talker capability serial polling and untalk on MLA My Listen Address No talk only capability Listener L4 Basic listener capability unlisten on MTA My Talk Address and no listen only capability Service request SR1 Full service request capability Remote local RL1 Full remote local capability Parallel polling PPO No parallel poll capability Device clear DC1 Full device clear capability Device trigger DT1 Device trigger capability Controller CO No controller capability Electric characteristics E1 Open collector 3 2 IM WT1801 17EN 3 2 GP IB Interface Features and Specifications Switching between Remote and Local Modes Switching from Local to Remote Mode The WT1800 switches to remote mode when it is in local mode and it receives a REN Remote Enable message from the PC The REMOTE indicator illuminates All keys except the LOCAL key are disabled The local mode settings are retained even when the WT1800 switches to remote mode Switching from Remote to Local Mode When the WT1800 is in remote mode and you press LOCAL the WT1800 switches to local mode This key combination is disabled if the local lockout state see page 3 7 for details has been activated by a controller The REMOTE indicator turns off Key operations are enabled Settings entered in remote mode are retained
193. g a USB cable For details on how to connect the WT1800 to a controller see page 2 3 IM WT1801 17EN e egye u JSN 2 2 USB Interface Features and Specifications USB Interface Features Reception Feature You can use the reception feature to specify the same settings that you specify by using the front panel keys The WT1800 can receive output requests for measured and computed data panel setup parameters and error codes Transmission Feature The WT1800 can transmit measured and computed data The WT1800 can transmit panel setup parameters and the status byte The WT1800 can transmit error codes when errors occur USB Interface Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications complies with USB Rev 2 0 Connector type B connector receptacle Number of ports 1 Power supply self powered System requirements a PC with a USB port running Windows 7 32 bit Windows Vista 32 bit or Windows XP 32 bit SP2 or later A separate device driver is required to enable the connection with the PC Switching between Remote and Local Modes Switching from Local to Remote Mode The WT1800 switches to remote mode when it is in local mode and it receives a COMMunicate REMote ON command from the PC The REMOTE indicator illuminates All keys except the LOCAL key are disabled The local mode settings are retained even when the WT1800 switches to remote mode Switching from Remote to Local Mode Whe
194. g cases e A CLS command is received The instrument is turned off and then back on You can determine whether the error queue is empty by checking bit 2 EAV in the status byte IM WT1801 17EN Appendix Appendix 1 Error Messages This section explains communication error messages On the WT1800 the messages can be displayed in the language that you specify with the Menu Language setting on the System Config menu However any messages that you read from a PC or other controller will be displayed in English If servicing is necessary to solve the problem indicated by a message contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Only communication error messages are listed here For details on other error messages see the user s manual IM WT1801 02bN Communication syntax errors 100 to 199 Communication execution errors 200 to 299 Device specific and other errors Communication query errors System communication errors 300 to 399 Listed below 400 to 499 300 and 399 Communication Syntax Errors 100 to 199 Code Message Corrective Action Page 102 Syntax error A syntax error not covered by error codes 100 to 199 Chapters 4 and 5 103 Invalid separator Separate data values with a comma 4 1 104 Data type error See page 4 6 and 4 7 and use the correct data type for 4 6 and each parameter 4 7 108 Parameter not allowed Check the number of dat
195. g gt MOTOR SPEE MOTOR SPEE MOTOR SPEE This command result SSPeed Sets or queries the frequency measurement source for the synchronous speed SyncSp computation MOTor SSPeed U lt x gt I lt x gt MOTor SSPeed x 1 to MOTOR SSPEED I1 MOTOR SSPEED gt computation result d UNIT String d UNIT Up to 8 characters D UNIT rpm D UNIT gt D UNIT rpm has no effect on the computation 6 element spuewwos uorneoiunuluio 2 MOTOR SSPEED I1 MOTor SYNChronize Sets or queries the synchronization source for the rotating speed Speed and torque Torque Function Syntax Example MOTor Function Syntax computations MOTor SYNC hronize U lt x gt I lt x gt EXTernal NONE MOTor SYNC 1 to EXTernal Clk NONE MOTOR SYNC MOTOR SYNC MOTOR SYNC x No s TORQue hronize 6 element External clock input Ext ynchronization source HRONIZE NONE HRONIZE gt HRONIZE NONE Queries all torque Torque settings MOTor TORQue IM WT1801 17EN 5 77 5 16 MOTor Group MOTor TORQue AUTO Function Sets or queries the voltage auto range on off status of the torque signal analog input type Syntax MOTor TORQue AUTO lt Boolean gt MOTor TORQue AUTO Example MOTOR TORQUE AUTO ON MOTOR TORQUE AUTO gt MOTOR TORQUE AUTO 1 Description This command is valid when the torque sign
196. ges cccccccecceceeeeeeaeeeceeseeaaeeeeeeeneaeeeeseseaaeaeeeeeeeenatees 3 7 Programming Overview 4 1 MeSSageS stasis tanta S 4 1 4 2 Commands m diets 4 3 4 3 creen ES 4 5 44 Dr c 4 6 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller esee een 4 8 Commands 5 1 List f Commands cited nein HE duret tetttelv tette 5 1 5 2 A QU Tiput GrOUp E EE 5 16 5 3 AUX GEOUp rtt et oe tena e dats HP oU itu ie ti bee eti tse 5 17 5 4 iSo n IIT RC jo To 5 19 5 5 eidcm 5 21 5 6 DISPlay Group tech ecce te i A ee rbv bug 5 23 5 7 ULE GOW m 5 42 5 8 HARMONICS Group c Sadie 5 45 5 9 FICOPY GROUP p a O 5 46 540 HOLED GtrOUp isi eec tue e Ca hu icc d rec Ra Lee c ree De ct 5 48 541 HSPeed GIOUp inierunt c cosmet esie sectetut el a es Adie esti cessi eene eL 5 49 9 12 IMAGE Group eret HE HOO rt iun er pt mE REM 5 55 MEME naeu nm 5 57 5 14 INTEGrate OroUp eie Ier eet HERED Lt rti n breeds 5 67 515 MEASutre GroUp iiiteseici cue eed hen rens te Eze oL E xD e a Da Codice uu Hua ete DE ena d 5 70 Sms gcuopm 5 75 5 17 ILC
197. he following symbols WARNING Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences CAUTION Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or cause damage to the instrument or user s data and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Note Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument Character Notations Panel Key Names and Soft Key Names in Bold Characters Indicate panel keys that are used in the procedure and soft keys and menu items that appear on the screen SHIFT Panel Key When SHIFT panel key appears in a procedural explanation it means to press the shift key so that it illuminates and then to press the indicated panel key A setup menu for the item written in purple below the key that you pressed appears on the screen Unit k Denotes 1000 Example 100 kHz K Denotes 1024 Example 720 KB file size Metasyntax The following table contains the symbols that are used in the syntax discussed mainly in chapters 4 and 5 These symbols are referred to as BNF Backus Naur Form symbols For details on how to write data using these symbols see pages 4 6 and 4 7 Symbol Description Example Example of Input lt gt A defined value ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1to6 ELEMENT2 3 Select an option in SQFo
198. he numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM lt x gt POSition NRf NRf DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM lt x gt POSition lt x gt 1 to 192 item number First NRf 0 to 800 X coordinate Second lt NRf gt 0 to 672 Y coordinate DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEMI POSITION 0 0 DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEMI POSITION gt DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEMI POSITION 0 0 Description The upper left corner of the numeric data display area is the origin and the specified coordinate refers to the upper left of the display item Example DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM lt x gt SIZE Function Sets or queries the font size of the specified display item of the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM lt x gt SIZE lt NRf gt DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom ITEM lt x gt SIZE lt x gt 1 to 192 item number lt NRf gt 14 16 20 24 32 48 64 96 128 DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEMI SIZE 20 DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEMI SIZE gt DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM ITEM1 SIZE 20 Example DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom PAGE Function Sets or queries the displayed page of the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom PAGE lt NRf gt DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom PAGE lt NRf gt 1 to 12 page number DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM PAGE 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM PAGE
199. he vector display is only available on models with the harmonic measurement G5 or G6 option DISPlay VECTor FORMat Function Sets or queries the display format of all vectors Syntax DISPlay VECTor FORMat SINGle DUAL DISPlay VECTor FORMat Example DISPLAY VECTOR FORMAT SINGLE DISPLAY VECTOR FORMAT gt DISPLAY VECTOR FORMAT SINGLE DISPlay VECTor ITEM lt x gt Function Syntax Queries all settings for the specified vector DISPlay VECTor ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 or 2 item number DISPlay VECTor ITEM lt x gt UMAG IMAG Function for the vector display Syntax DISPlay VECTor ITEM lt x gt UMAG IMAG lt NRf gt DISPlay VECTor ITEM lt x gt UMAG IMAG lt x gt 1 or 2 item number lt NRf gt 0 100 to 100 000 DISPLAY VECTOR ITEM1 UMAG 1 DISPLAY VECTOR ITEM1 UMAG gt DISPLAY VECTOR ITEM1 UMAG 1 000 Gl Example Gl DISPlay VECTor NUMeric Sets or queries the voltage or current zoom factor DISPlay VECTor ITEM lt x gt OBJect Function Sets or queries the wiring unit that is displayed using the specified vector Syntax DISPlay VECTor ITEM x OBJect lt Element gt Function Sets or queries the on off status of the numeric data display on the vector display Syntax DISPlay VECTor NUMeric Boolean DISPlay VECTor NUMeric Example DISPLAY VECTOR NUMERIC ON DISPLAY VECTOR NUMERIC Oo DISPLAY VEC
200. ied element Syntax INTEGrate QMODe ELEMent lt x gt RMS MEAN DC RMEAN AC INTEGrate QMODe ELEMent x x 1 to 6 element Example INTEGRATE OMODE ELEMENT1 DC NTEGRATE OMODE ELEMENT1 gt NTEGRATE QMODE ELEMENT1 DC Description Regardless of the independent element integration setting INTEGrate INDependent the WT1800 operates according to the electric current mode of the specified element INTEGrate RESet Function Resets the integrated value Syntax INTEGrate RESet lt NRf gt lt NR gt NR NR NR NR lt NRf gt 1 to 6 element Example INTEGRATE RESET resets all elements INTEGRATE RESET 1 2 3 resets the Specified elements Description When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to ON 1 you can use the parameters to specify which elements to perform the operation on If you omit the parameters the operation will be performed on all the elements When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to OFF 0 you cannot use the parameters to specify elements INTEGrate RTAL1 STARt END Function Collectively sets the integration start or end time of all elements for real time integration mode Syntax INTEGrate RTAL1 STARt END NRf NRf NRf NRf NRf NRf lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt lt NR gt 200
201. ies all LCD color settings 5 98 SYSTem LCD COLor BASecolor Sets or queries the screen menu base color 5 98 SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh Queries all waveform color settings 5 98 SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh Sets or queries the specified waveform s color 5 99 CHANnel lt x gt SYSTem LCD COLor GRAPh PRESet Presets the waveform color pattern 5 99 SYSTem LCD COLor INTENsity Sets or queries the grid intensity 5 99 GRID SYSTem LCD STATe Sets or queries the on off status of the backlight 5 99 SYSTem MODel1 Queries the model code 5 99 SYSTem RESolution Sets or queries the numeric data display resolution 5 99 SYSTem SERial Queries the serial number 5 99 SYSTem SUFFix Queries the suffix code 5 99 SYSTem TIME Sets or queries the time 5 99 SYSTem USBKeyboard Sets or queries the USB keyboard type 5 99 IM WT1801 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page WAVeform Group WAVeform Queries all waveform display data output settings 5 100 WAVeform BYTeorder Sets or queries the output byte order of the waveform display data FLOAT 5 100 format that is transmitted by the WAVeform SEND command WAVeform END WAVeform FORMat Sets or queries the output end point of the waveform display data that is 5 100 transmitted by the WAVeform SEND command Sets or queries the format of the waveform display data that is transmitted by 5 100 the WAVeform SEND command WAVeform HOL
202. ies all trend display settings 5 33 DISPlay TRENd ALL Collectively sets the on off status of all trends 5 33 DISPlay TRENd CLEar Clears all trends 5 34 DISPlay TRENd FORMat Sets or queries the display format of all trends 5 34 DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt Queries all settings for the specified trend 5 34 DISPlay TRENd Sets or queries the function element and harmonic order of the specified 5 34 ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion trend item DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing Queries all scaling settings for the specified trend 5 34 DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing Sets or queries the scaling mode of the specified trend 5 34 MODE DISPlay TRENd ITEM lt x gt SCALing Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the manual scaling of the 5 34 VALue specified trend DISPlay TRENd T lt x gt Sets or queries the on off status of the specified trend 5 34 DISPlay TRENd TDIV Sets or queries the trend horizontal axis T div 5 35 DISPlay VECTor Queries all vector display settings 5 35 DISPlay VECTor FORMat Sets or queries the display format of all vectors 5 35 DISPlay VECTor ITEM lt x gt Queries all settings for the specified vector 5 35 DISPlay VECTor ITEM lt x gt OBJect Sets or queries the wiring unit that is displayed using the specified vector 5 35 DISPlay VECTor Sets or queries the voltage or current zoom factor for the vector display 5 35 ITEM lt x gt UMAG IMAG DISPlay VECTor NUMeric Se
203. ies the on off status of the cursor position linkage on the trend display CURSor TRENd LINKage lt Boolean gt CURSor TRENd LINKage CURSOR TREND LINKAGE OFF CURSOR TREND LINKAGE gt CURSOR TREND LINKAGE 0 CURSor TRENd POSition lt x gt Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the position of the specified cursor on the trend display CURSor TRENd POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor TRENd POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 1 Cl 2 C2 x lt NR gt 0 to 1601 CURSOR TREND POSITION1 160 CURSOR TREND POSITION1 gt CURSOR TREND POSITION1 160 CURSor TRENd STATe Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the on off status of the cursor display on the trend display CURSor TRENd STATe Boolean CURSor TRENd STATe CURSOR TREND STATE ON CURSOR TREND STATE gt CURSOR TREND STATE 1 IM WT1801 17EN 5 21 5 5 CURSor Group CURSor TRENd TRACe lt x gt Function Sets or queries the target of the specified cursor on the trend display Syntax CURSor TRENd TRACe x lt NRf gt CURSor TRENd TRACe lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 1 Cl 2 C2 x lt NR gt 1 to 16 T1 to T16 Example CURSOR TREND TRACE1 1 CURSOR TREND TRACE1 gt CURSOR TREND TRACE1 1 CURSOor TRENd X lt x gt YXx DY Function Queries the measured value of the specified curso
204. ies the on off status of the waveform labels 5 36 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger Queries all trigger settings 5 37 5 4 IM WT1801 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page DISPlay WAVE TRIGger LEVel Sets or queries the trigger level 5 37 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE Sets or queries the trigger mode 5 37 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SLOPe Sets or queries the trigger slope 5 37 DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SOURce Sets or queries the trigger source 5 37 DISPlay WAVE Sets or queries the on off status of the voltage current rotating speed 5 37 U x I x SPEed TORQue AUX x torque or auxiliary signal waveform display DISPlay WAVE VZoom Queries all waveform vertical zoom factor settings 5 37 DISPlay WAVE VZoom U lt x gt I lt x gt Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of the specified element s voltage or 5 37 current waveform DISPlay WAVE VZoom UALL IALL Collectively sets the vertical zoom factor for the voltage or current waveforms 5 37 of all elements FILE Group gt FILE Queries all file operation settings 5 42 FILE CDIRectory Changes the current directory 5 42 FILE DELete Deletes the specified screen image data file 5 42 IMAGe BMP PNG JPEG FILE DELete NUMeric ASCii Deletes the specified num
205. in custom display mode DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE Sets or queries the automatic file name generation feature for saving display 5 26 SAVE ANAMing configuration files of the numeric display in custom display mode DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE Saves the specified display configuration file for the numeric display in 5 26 SAVE ITEM custom display mode DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom Queries all the settings of the specified display item of the numeric display in 5 26 TEM lt x gt custom display mode SPlay NUMeric CUSTom Sets or queries the font color of the specified display item of the numeric 5 27 TEM lt x gt COLor display in custom display mode SPlay NUMeric CUSTom Sets or queries the display item numeric item or string of the numeric 5 27 TEM lt x gt FUNCtion display in custom display mode SPlay NUMeric CUSTom Sets or queries the display position of the specified display item of the 5 28 TEM lt x gt POSition numeric display in custom display mode e SPlay NUMeric CUSTom Sets or queries the font size of the specified display item of the numeric 5 28 3 TEM x SIZE display in custom display mode 3 DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom PAGE Sets or queries the displayed page of the numeric display in custom display 5 28 a mode o DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom PERPage Sets or queries the number of items displayed per page of the numeric 5 28 display in custom display mode DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom TOTal Sets or queries the total number of display items of
206. ion Sets or queries the function element and harmonic order of the specified numeric display item in 4 Items 8 Items or 16 Items display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 ITEM lt x gt NONE lt Function gt lt Element gt lt Order gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 48 item number when VAL4 is specified lt x gt 1 to 96 item number when VAL8 is specified lt x gt 1 to 192 item number when VAL16 is specified NONE No display item Function URMS IRMS PISIQI Element NRf SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt NRf gt 1 to 6 Order TOTal DC lt NRf gt lt NR gt 1 to 500 Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 TEM1 URMS 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 TEM1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 TEM1 URMS 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 TEM1 UK 1 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 TEM1 gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 TEM1 UK 1 1 Description For information about the options available for lt Function gt see Function Option List 1 on page 5 38 lt Element gt and lt Order gt are omitted from responses to functions that do not need them If lt Element gt is omitted the element is set to 1 If Order is omitted the order is set to TOTal DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PAGE Function Sets or que
207. ions available for Function see Function Option List 1 in the DISPlay Group section on page 5 38 f Element is omitted the element is set to 1 f Order is omitted the order is set to TOTal Element and Order are omitted from responses to functions that do not need them NUMeric NORMal NUMber Function Sets or queries the number of numeric data items that are transmitted by the NUMeric NORMal VALue command Syntax NUMeric NORMal NUMber lt NRf gt ALL NUMeric NORMal NUMber lt NR gt 1 to 255 ALL NUMERIC NORMAL NUMBER 15 NUMERIC NORMAL NUMBER gt NUMERIC NORMAL NUMBER 15 Description If the parameter is omitted from the NUMeric NORMal VALue command the numeric data items from 1 to the specified value are output Example in order By default the number of numeric data items is set to 15 NUMeric NORMal PRESet Function Presets the numeric data output item pattern Syntax NUMeric NORMal PRESet lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 4 Example NUMERIC NORMAL PRESET 1 Description For information about the output items that are preset see 1 Preset Patterns for Numeric Data Items on page 5 88 at the end of the commands for this group By default the output items of Pattern 2 are selected NUMeric NORMal VALue Function Queries the numeric data Syntax NUMeric NORMal VALue lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 255 item number
208. iption This command is only valid on models with the delta computation DT option Example MEASure DMeasure SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Function Sets or queries the delta computation mode for wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C Syntax MEASure DMeasure SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC OFF DIFFerence P3W3 V3A3 ST DT DT STJ MEASure DMeasure SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC MEASURE DMEASURE SIGMA OFF MEASURE DMEASURE SIGMA gt MEASURE DMEASURE SIGMA OFF Description This command is only valid on models with the delta computation DT option The available options are explained below The modes that can be selected vary depending on the wiring system of the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C OFF No delta computation only selectable with a single phase two wire system 1P2W DIFFerence Differential voltage differential current only selectable with a single phase three wire system 1P3W or a three phase three wire system 3P3W P3W3_V3A3 3P3W to 3V3A conversion only selectable with a single phase three wire system 1P3W or a three phase three wire system 3P3W ST_DT Star to delta conversion only selectable with a three phase four wire system 3P4W DT_ST Delta to star conversion only selectable with a three phase three wire system that uses the three voltage three current method 3P3W 3V3A Example 5 70 IM WT1801 17EN 5 15 MEASure Group MEASure EFFiciency Function Que
209. le Description STB Function Syntax Example Description TRG Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the service request enable register SRE lt NRf gt SRE lt NRf gt to 255 SRE 239 SRE gt 175 MSS because the bit 6 setting is ignored Specify the value as a sum of the values of each bit in decimal format For example specifying SRE 239 will cause the standard enable register to be set to 11101111 In this case bit 4 of the service request enable register is disabled This means that bit 4 MAV of the status byte register is not set to 1 even if the output queue is not empty Bit 6 MSS of the status byte register is the MSS bit itself and is therefore ignored The default value is SRE 0 all bits disabled A query using SRE will not clear the contents of the service request enable register For information about the service request enable register see page 6 3 Queries the status byte register STB STB gt 4 A sum of the values of each bit is returned as a decimal value Because the register is read without executing serial polling bit 6 is an MSS bit not an RQS bit For example if a value of 4 is returned this indicates that the status byte register is set to 00000100 This means that the error queue is not empty in other words an error occurred A query using STB will not clear the contents of the status byte register For information about
210. le of the revolution signal analog input type Syntax MOTor SPEed LSCale CALCulate P1X P1Y P2X P2Y NRf MOTor SPEed LSCale CALCulate P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt NRf gt 1 000E 12 to 1 000E 12 Example MOTOR SPEED LSCALE CALCULATE P1X 0 MOTOR SPEED LSCALE CALCULATE PIX gt MOTOR SPEED LSCALE CALCULATE P1X 0 000E 00 MOTor SPEed LSCale CALCulate EXECute Function Calculates parameters for the linear scale of the revolution signal analog input type Syntax MOTor SPEed LSCale CALCulate EXECute Example MOTOR SPEED LSCALE CALCULATE EXECUTE Description The WT1800 uses the data that has been specified Point1X Point1Y Point2X and Point2Y to calculate and set the slope A and offset B of the linear scale 5 76 IM WT1801 17EN 5 16 MOTor Group MOTor SPEed PRANge Function Sets or queries the range of the revolution signal pulse input type Syntax MOTor SPEed PRANge lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MOTor SPEed PRANge NRf 0 0000 to 99999 9999 Example MOTOR SPEED PRANGE 10000 0 MOTOR SPEED PRANGE gt MOTOR SPEED PRANGE 10000 0000 0 0000 Description Set the upper limit and then the lower limit This command is valid when the revolution signal input type MOTor SPEed TYPE is set to PULSe pulse input MOTor SPEed PULSe Function Sets or queries the number of pulses of the revolution signal pulse input type Syntax MOTor SPEed PUL
211. llowed Use a data type other than Chapter 5 150 String data error Enclose parameters with single or double quotation 4 7 marks where the syntax contains lt string data gt IM WT1801 17EN App 1 xipueddy H Appendix 1 Error Messages Code Message Corrective Action Page 151 Invalid string data The parameter is either too long or it contains an Chapter 5 unusable character 158 String data not allowed Use a data type other than lt string data gt Chapter 5 161 Invalid block data lt Block data gt cannot be used 4 7 and chapter 5 168 Block data not allowed lt Block data gt cannot be used 4 7 and chapter 5 171 Missing Right Equations cannot be used 172 Invalid expression Equations cannot be used Chapter 5 178 Expression data not allowed Equations cannot be used Chapter 5 181 Invalid outside macro definition The WT1800 does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications Communication Execution Errors 200 to 299 Code Message Corrective Action Page 221 Setting conflict Check settings that are related to each other Chapter 5 222 Data out of range Check the ranges of the settings Chapter 5 223 Too much data Check data byte lengths Chapter 5 224 Illegal parameter value Check the ranges of the settings Chapter 5 225 OverFlow Keep program messages including lt PMT gt to 1024 4 2 bytes or less in
212. lt x gt RANGe lt x gt 1 or 2 AUX input channel Voltage 50 mV 100 mV 200 mv 500 mV L V 2 V 5 V LO WV 20 WV Example AUX1 RANGE 20V AUX1 RANGE gt AUX1 RANGE 20 00E 00 AUX lt x gt SCALing Function Sets or queries the auxiliary input scaling factor Syntax AUX lt x gt SCALing lt NRf gt AUX lt x gt SCALing lt x gt 1 or 2 AUX input channel NRf 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example AUX1 SCALING 1 AUX1 SCALING gt AUX1 SCALING 1 0000 gt AUX lt x gt UNIT Function Sets or queries the unit to assign to the auxiliary input Syntax AUX lt x gt UNIT String AUX x UNIT x 1 or 2 AUX input channel lt String gt Up to 8 characters Example AUX1 UNIT kW m2 AUX1 UNIT gt AUX1 UNIT kW m2 specified Point1X Point1Y Point2X and Point2Y to calculate and set the slope A and offset B of the linear scale Description This command has no effect on the computation result 5 18 IM WT1801 17EN 5 4 COMMunicate Group The commands in this group deal with communications There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group COMMunicate Function Queries all communication settings Syntax COMMunicate COMMunicate HEADer Function Sets or queries whether a header is added to the response to a query Example with header DISPLAY MODE NUMERIC Example without header NUMERIC Syntax COMMuni
213. lue other than 0 for MANual or RTIMe mode STORe SMODe Function Sets or queries the storage mode Syntax STORe SMODe MANual RTIMe INTEGrate EVENt SINGle STORe SMODe MANual Manual storage mode RTIMe Real time storage mode INTEGrate Integration synchronized storage mode EVENt Event synchronized storage mode SINGle Single shot storage mode Example STORE SMODE MANUAL STORE SMODE gt STORE SMODE MANUAL STORe STARt Function Begins the storing of numeric data Syntax STORe STARt Example STORE START Description If STORe SMODe is set to MANual the storage operation is executed If STORe SMODe is set to RTIMe INTEGrate or EVENt the WT1800 enters into a storage wait state If STORe SMODe is set to SINGle the storage operation is executed STORe STATe Function Sets or queries the storage state Syntax STORe STATe Example STORE STATE gt RESET Description The response is as follows RESet Storage reset READy Storage standby STARt Currently storing STOP Storage stopped COMPlete Storage complete or ended due to an error CONVert Converting stored data to CSV format CLOSe Final processing of a WTS or HDS file STORe STOP Function Stops the storing of numeric data Syntax STORe STOP Example STORE STOP STORe TEVent Function Sets or queries the event that the event synchronized storage mode will trigger on Syntax STORe TEV
214. ly of Data Responses that cannot be used as program messages unless changes are made query only commands are returned without headers However there are query only commands whose responses the WT1800 will attach headers to Example INPut POVer PMT O RMT If You Want the WT1800 to Return Responses without Headers You can configure the WT 1800 so that even responses that have both headers and data are returned without headers Use the COMMunicate HEADer command for this purpose Abbreviated Form The WT1800 normally returns response headers with the lower case section removed You can configure the WT1800 so that full headers are returned Use the COMMunicate VERBose command for this purpose The sections enclosed in square brackets are also omitted in the abbreviated form IM WT1801 17EN M9IAJ9AQ BuruueJ60Jd gt 4 4 Data Data Data contains conditions and values that are written after the header A space separates the data from the header Data is classified as follows Data Meaning lt Decimal gt A value expressed in decimal notation Example VT ratio setting INPut SCALing VT ELEMent1 100 lt Voltage gt lt Current gt A physical value lt Time gt lt Frequency gt Example Voltage range setting gt INPut VOLTage RANGE ELEMent1 100V Register A register value expressed as binary octal decimal or hexadecimal Example Extended event
215. m TWAVe Trend and waveform displays 5 TBAR Trend and bar graph displays o PPTA RURY S HE EER DS EOMER TVECtor Trend and vector displays E HSPeed High speed data capturing 9 DISPlay INFOrmation mode display numeric display p Function Queries all setup parameter list display settings Example DISPLAY MODE NUMERIC 3 Syntax DISPlay INFOrmation DISPLAY MODE lt gt i DISPLAY MODE NUMERIC amp DISPlay INFOrmation PAGE Description BAR VECTor NBAR NVECtor WBAR WVECtor o Function Sets or queries the displayed page of the setup TBAR and TVECtor can only be selected on parameter list display models with the harmonic measurement G5 or Syntax DISPlay INFOrmation PAGE POWer G6 option RANGe NRf DISPlay INFOrmation PAGE POWer or lt NRf gt 1 Tables of each element s measurement HSPeed can only be selected on models with the high speed data capturing HS option conditions Power Element Settings DISPlay NUMeric RANGe or NRf 2 Function Queries all numeric display settings Indicators of each element s voltage Syntax DISPlay NUMeric and current range settings Range Settings DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom Example DISPLAY INFORMATION PAGE POWER Function Queries all numeric display settings in custom DISPLAY INFORMATION PAGE gt display mode DTS POAN eae POWER Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom DISPlay INFOrmation STATe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the se
216. m or minimum value for D A output items 5 16 AUX Group AUX lt x gt Queries all auxiliary input settings 5 17 AUX lt x gt AUTO Sets or queries the voltage auto range on off status of the specified auxiliary 5 17 AUX lt x gt FILTer Queries all input filter settings for the auxiliary inputs 5 17 AUX lt x gt FILTer LINE Sets or queries the line filter for the auxiliary inputs 5 17 9 AUX lt x gt LSCale Queries all auxiliary input linear scaling settings 5 17 3 AUX lt x gt LSCale AVALue Sets or queries the slope A of the linear scale of the auxiliary input feature 5 17 3 AUX lt x gt LSCale BVALue Sets or queries the offset B of the linear scale of the auxiliary input feature 5 17 a AUX lt x gt LSCale CALCulate Queries all parameter calculation settings for the linear scale of the auxiliary 5 17 o input feature AUX lt x gt LSCale Sets or queries the data Point1X Point1Y Point2X or Point2Y for 5 17 CALCulate P1X P1Y P2xX P2Y parameter calculations of the linear scale of the auxiliary input feature AUX lt x gt LSCale CALCulate Calculates parameters for the linear scale of the auxiliary input feature 5 18 EXECute AUX lt x gt NAME Sets or queries the auxiliary input name 5 18 AUX lt x gt RANGe Sets or queries the auxiliary input voltage range 5 18 AUX x SCALing Sets or queries the auxiliary input scaling factor 5 18 AUX lt x gt UNIT Sets or queries the unit to assign to the auxiliary input 5 18
217. med by the transition filter Fillexx gt gt 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Condition register 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 43 2 11 0 STATus CONDition Pov OVRM OVR6 OVR5 OVR4 OVR3 OVR2 OVR1 PLLE ACS PRN FOV STR ITM ITG UPD Transition filter A 2 AE 2 n I __ __ __ __y __ __y__ __ 09 87 6543 21 0 STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE FALL BOTH NEVer YY Y Y Y VY VY vt Y Y Y Y VY YY YY Extended event register 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STATus EESR The condition register bits are described below Bit 0 UPD Updating Set to 1 when the measured data is being updated UPD changing from 1 to 0 indicates that updating has been completed Bit 1 ITG Integrate Busy Set to 1 during integration Bit 2 ITM Integrate Timer Busy Set to 1 when the integration timer is operating Bit 3 STR Store Busy Set to 1 during storage Bit 4 FOV Frequency Over Set to 1 when a frequency error occurs Bit 5 PRN Printing Set to 1 when the built in printer is operating Bit 6 ACS Accessing Set to 1 when a drive is being accessed Bit 7 PLLE PLL Source Input Set to 1 when during harmonic measurement there is no Error PLL source or synchronization cannot be achieved Bit 8 OVR1 Element1 Measured Set to 1 when the voltage or current of
218. ment Syntax INPut NULL TARGet U lt x gt I lt x gt ON HOLD OFF INPut NULL TARGet U lt x gt I lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element ON NULL feature enabled When NULL is set to ON a new NULL value is acquired HOLD NULL feature enabled When NULL is set to ON the previous NULL value is maintained OFF NULL feature disabled NULL operation is not performed INPUT NULL TARGET U1 ON INPUT NULL TARGET U1 gt INPUT NULL TARGET U1 ON Example INPut NULL TARGet UALL IALL Function Collectively sets the target of the voltage or current NULL operation of all elements Syntax INPut NULL TARGet UALL IALL ON HOLD OFF ON NULL feature enabled When NULL is set to ON a new NULL value is acquired HOLD NULL feature enabled When NULL is set to ON the previous NULL value is maintained OFF NULL feature disabled NULL operation is not performed INPUT NULL TARGET UALL ON Example INPut POVer Function Queries the peak over range information Syntax INPut POVer Example INPUT POVER gt 0 Description The peak over range information of each element is mapped as shown below For the response the sum of the values of each bit is returned in decimal format For example a response of 16 indicates that a peak over range is occurring at U3 15 14 13 1211109 87 654 32 1 0 A2 A 1 Tq Sp 16 U6 15 us i4 UA 3 us i2 U2 11 U1
219. mote Control Network VXI 11 ae IP Address Time Out Network PB 7X USB JUR Set the timeout Network with the cursor keys m D A Output Items E Selftest Note ____ Only use one communication interface GP IB USB or Network If you send commands simultaneously from more than one communication interface the WT1800 will not execute the commands properly TCP IP Settings To use the Ethernet interface you must specify the following TCP IP settings P address Subnet mask Default gateway For instructions on how to specify these settings see section 19 2 Configuring TCP IP Settings in the WT1800 User s Manual IM WT1801 02bN 1 4 IM WT1801 17EN Chapter 2 USB Interface 2 1 Front Panel Component Names and Functions LOCAL key Press this key to switch from remote mode in which settings and operations are performed through remote commands to local mode in which operations can be performed using the WT1800 keys This key is disabled when local lockout see page 2 2 has been activated by a controller YOKOGAWA 4p WT1800 sor mes mns o o 8 8 VOLTAGE RANGE CURRENT RANGE Eel eo noon DEDE v CD REI v ELLE s cb DISPLAY ITEM amp ELEMENT Ea C
220. ms Syntax AOUTput NORMal RATE lt x gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt AOUTput NORMal RATE lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 20 output channel lt NRf gt 9 999E 12 to 9 999E 12 AOUTPUT NORMAL RATE1 100 100 AOUTPUT NORMAL RATE1 gt AOUTPUT NORMAL RATE1 100 0E 00 100 0E 00 Description Set the upper limit and then the lower limit This setting is valid when the D A output rated value setup mode AOUTput NORMal MODE lt xz gt is set to MANual Example IM WT1801 17EN 5 3 AUX Group The commands in this group deal with the auxiliary input feature You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing MOTOR AUX SET SHIFT SCALING on the front panel The commands in this group are only valid on models with the auxiliary input AUX option AUX lt x gt Function Queries all auxiliary input settings Syntax AUX lt x gt lt x gt 1 or 2 AUX input channel AUX lt x gt AUTO Function Sets or queries the voltage auto range on off status of the specified auxiliary input Syntax AUX lt x gt AUTO Boolean AUX lt x gt AUTO lt x gt 1 or 2 AUX input channel Example AUX1 AUTO ON AUX1 AUTO gt AUX1 AUTO 1 AUX lt x gt FILTer Function Queries all input filter settings for the auxiliary inputs Syntax AUX lt x gt FILTer Description The lt x gt value in AUX lt x gt has no meaning in the setting or query AUX lt x gt
221. n the WT1800 is in remote mode and you press LOCAL the WT 1800 switches to local mode However this does not work if the WT1800 has received a COMMunicate LOCKout ON command from the PC The WT1800 switches to local mode when it receives a COMMunicate REMote OFF command from the PC regardless of the local lockout state The REMOTE indicator turns off Key operations are enabled Settings entered in remote mode are retained even when the WT1800 switches to local mode Note You cannot use the USB interface simultaneously with other interfaces GP IB and Ethernet interfaces 2 2 IM WT1801 17EN 2 3 Connecting to the USB Interface Notes about Connections Be sure to insert the USB cable connector firmly into the USB port If you are connecting multiple devices by using a USB hub connect the WT1800 to the USB hub port that is closest to the port that the controller is connected to Do not connect or remove USB cables from the time when the WT1800 is turned on until operation becomes available approximately 20 to 30 seconds Doing so may damage the WT1800 IM WT1801 17EN 2 3 e epge jul JSN 2 4 Configuring the WT1800 USB Settings This section explains the following setting for controlling the WT1800 remotely through a USB interface Viewing the serial number that is used in USB TMC communications UTILITY Remote Control Menu Press UTILITY the Remote Control soft key and then the USB sof
222. nchronized print Function Queries all auto print settings mode Syntax HCOPy AUTO Example HCOPY AUTO MODE INTERVAL HCOPY AUTO MODE gt HCOPy AUTO COUNt HCOPY AUTO MODE INTERVAL Function Sets or queries the auto print count Syntax HCOPy AUTO COUNt NRf INFinite HCOPy AUTO PASTart HCOPy AUTO COUNt Function Sets or queries whether printing starts when auto lt NR gt 1 to 9999 printing starts INFinite No limit Syntax HCOPy AUTO PASTart lt Boolean gt Example HCOPY AUTO COUNT INFINITE HCOPy AUTO PASTart HCOPY AUTO COUNT gt Example HCOPY AUTO PASTART OFF HCOPY AUTO COUNT INFINITE HCOPY AUTO PASTART gt Description This command is valid when the auto print HCOPY AUTO PASTART 0 operation mode HCOPy AUTO MODE is set to Description This command is valid when the auto print INTerval RTIMe or EVENt operation mode HCOPy AUTO MODE is set to INTerval RTIMe or INTEGrate HCOPy AUTO INTerval Function Sets or queries the auto print interval HCOPy AUTO STARt END Syntax HCOPy AUTO INTerval NRf NRf Function Sets or queries the printing start or end time for lt NRf gt real time printing mode HCOPy AUTO INTerval Syntax HCOPy AUTO STARt END lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR f gt 0 0 10 to NRf NRf NRf NRf 99 59 59 HCOPy AUTO STARt END First NRf 0 to 99 hours NR NR NR NR
223. nd To query whether each bit of the standard event enable register is 1 or 0 use ESE For details on the ESE command see chapter 5 Standard Event Register Operation The standard event register indicates eight types of events that occur inside the instrument When one of the bits in this register becomes 1 and the corresponding bit of the standard event enable register is also 1 bit 5 ESB in the status byte is set to 1 Example 1 A query error occurs 2 Bit 2 QYE is set to 1 3 If bit 2 of the standard event enable register is 1 bit 5 ESB in the status byte is set to 1 You can also check what type of event occurred in the WT1800 by reading the contents of the standard event register Reading the Standard Event Register You can use the ESR command to read the contents of the standard event register The register is cleared after it is read Clearing the Standard Event Register The standard event register is cleared in the following three cases The contents of the standard event register are read using the ESR command A CLS command is received The instrument is turned off and then back on 6 4 IM WT1801 17EN 6 4 Extended Event Register The extended event register receives information about changes in the condition register which indicates the instrument s internal condition The information is the result of edge detection perfor
224. nd Edition August 2011 2nd Edition August 2011 YMI All Rights Reserved Copyright 2011 Yokogawa Meters amp Instruments Corporation IM WT1801 17EN About the USB Interface and Ethernet Interface To use the USB communication features your PC must have the following WT1800 library TMCTL USB device driver for connecting the WT1800 to the PC To use the Ethernet communication features your PC must have the following e WT1800 library TMCTL You can download the library and driver from the following web page http tmi yokogawa com IM WT1801 17EN How to Use This Manual Structure of the Manual This manual contains six chapters and an appendix Chapter 1 Ethernet Interface Describes the features and specifications of the Ethernet interface Chapter 2 USB Interface Describes the features and specifications of the USB interface Chapter 3 GP IB Interface Describes the GP IB interface features and specifications Chapter 4 Programming Overview Describes command syntax and other programming information Chapter 5 Commands Describes every command individually Chapter 6 Status Reports Describes the status byte various registers and queues Appendix Describes error messages and provides other information Index IM WT1801 17EN iii How to Use This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual Notes and Cautions The notes and cautions in this manual are categorized using t
225. nd stop time 5 46 print interval 5 46 program message resi ce epe Det cad Let ee cea 4 1 Q Page DU 4 1 R Page rated value setup mode ssssssseeseeee 5 16 rated integration time is real time continuous integration mode 5 67 real time normal integration mode sssse 5 67 real time print ModE krsi nan aeaea 5 46 real time storage MOJ erisin eiai 5 96 rear panel 1 1 2 1 3 1 SONS US PELO 4 7 remote and local modes switching 1 2 2 2 3 3 REN Remote Enable rise ido rss 3 7 response es 4 5 response message es 4 1 response without headers ssssssssseeee 4 5 revolution signal input type 5 77 rotating SPCC i L 5 76 S Sample Tale inssi sepe ne ev od obtutu sampling frequency coe ee cire reiten e crees saving data to filas 2 tein teet safe scale value display SCAN see S scheduled storage time screen brightriess cect eric coim iios Screen display Color ine cnn tpa Desa SDC Selected Device Clear T Selfless are E O I II 5 99 senal pollifig 5 eee tior e Nanana Di iR AEAEE TE service request enable register ccccceseceeeeteeeeeeee setup parameter list displaying single phase three wire sseeesesseeseeee Single phase two wire
226. ned function Syntax MEASure FUNCtion x STATe lt Boolean gt MEASure FUNCtioncx STATe x 1 to 20 F1 to F20 Example MEASURE FUNCTION1 STATE ON MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt UNIT x 1 to 20 F1 to F20 String Up to 8 characters M M o MEASURE FUNCTION1 STATE gt 3 MEASURE FUNCTION1 STATE 1 3 a 3 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt UNIT o Function Sets or queries the unit that is added to the S computation result of the specified user defined 3 function p Syntax MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt UNIT String Z D 5 Qo o J EASURE FUNCTION1 UNIT W EASURE FUNCTION1 UNIT gt MEASURE FUNCTION1 UNIT W Description This command has no effect on the computation result Example MEASure MHOLd Function Sets or queries the on off status of the MAX HOLD feature used in user defined functions Syntax MEASure MHOLd lt Boolean gt MEASure MHOLd Example MEASURE MHOLD ON MEASURE MHOLD gt MEASURE MHOLD 1 Description The MAX HOLD operation starts when the MAX HOLD feature is specified by a user defined function and MEASure MHOL4d is set to ON When MEASure MHOLd is set to OFF the MAX HOLD operation ends and the MAX HOLD value becomes no data If MEASure MHOLd is set to ON after having already been set to ON before the MAX HOLD value is reset and the MAX HOLD operation starts again For information about specifying
227. need to repeatedly set WAVeform HOLD to OFF WAVeform LENGth Function Queries the total number of points of the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command Syntax WAVeform LENGth Example WAVEFORM LENGTH gt 1602 Description The number of data points is fixed This command always returns 1602 5 100 IM WT1801 17EN 5 22 WAVeform Group WAVeform SEND Function Queries the waveform display data specified by the WAVeform TRACe command Syntax WAVeform SEND Example When WAVeform FORMat is set to ASCii WAVEFORM SEND gt lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt When WAVeform FORMat is set to FLOat WAVEFORM SEND gt 4 4 digit number of bytes data byte Sequence Description The format of the waveform display data that is output varies depending on how the WAVeform FORMat command is set The different formats are explained below 1 When the format is set to ASCii Physical values are output in lt NR3 gt format The points are separated by commas 2 When the format is set to FLOat Physical values are output in IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format The output byte order of the data of each point follows the order that is set by using the WAVeform BYTeorder command WAVeform SRATe Function Queries the sample rate of the acquired waveform Syntax WAVeform SRATe Example WAVEFORM SRATE gt 32 000E 03 WAVeform STARt Function Sets or queries the output
228. nnot use the parameters to specify elements INTEGrate TIMer lt x gt Function Sets or queries the integration timer value Syntax INTEGrate TIMer lt x gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt NRf INTEGrate TIMer lt x gt x 1 to 6 element lt NR gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt 0 0 0 to 10000 O0 0 First NRf 0 to 10000 hours Second lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minutes Third NRf 0 to 59 seconds Example INTEGRATE TIMER1 1 0 0 INTEGRATE TIMER1 gt INTEGRATE TIMER1 1 0 0 Description When independent element integration INTEGrate INDependent is set to OFF 0 you can omit lt x gt lt x gt 1 The operation is performed on all elements using element 1 s integration timer INTEGrate TMAL1 Function Collectively sets the integration timer of all elements Syntax INTEGrate TMAL1 NRf NRf NRf lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0 0 to 10000 0 0 First NRf 0 to 10000 hours Second lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minutes Third NRf 0 to 59 seconds Example INTEGRATE TMALL 1 0 0 INTEGrate WPTYpe Function Queries the watt hour integration methods for each polarity WP WP of all elements Syntax INTEGrate WPTYpe INTEGrate WPTYpe ALL Function Collectively sets the watt hour integration method for each polarity WP WP of all elements Syntax INTEGrate WPTYpe ALL CHARge SOLD Example INTEGRATE WPTYPE ALL CHARGE INTEGrate WPTYp
229. nput type MOTor SPEed TYPE is set to ANALog analog input Example MOTor SPEed LSCale Function Queries all revolution signal analog input type linear scaling settings Syntax MOTor SPEed LSCale Description Linear scaling settings are valid when the revolution signal input type MOTor SPEed TYPE is set to ANALog analog input MOTor SPEed LSCale AVALue Function Sets or queries the slope A of the linear scale of the revolution signal analog input type Syntax MOTor SPEed LSCale AVALue lt NRf gt MOTor SPEed LSCale AVALue lt NRf gt 1 000E 03 to 1 000E 06 MOTOR SPEED LSCALE AVALUE 1 000 MOTOR SPEED LSCALE AVALUE gt MOTOR SPEED LSCALE AVALUE 1 000E 00 Example MOTor SPEed LSCale BVALue Function Sets or queries the offset B of the linear scale of the revolution signal analog input type Syntax MOTor SPEed LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt MOTor SPEed LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt 1 000E 06 to 1 000E 06 Example MOTOR SPEED LSCALE BVALUE 0 MOTOR SPEED LSCALE BVALUE gt MOTOR SPEED LSCALE BVALUE 0 000E 00 MOTor SPEed LSCale CALCulate Function Queries all parameter calculation settings for the linear scale of the revolution signal analog input type Syntax MOTor SPEed LSCale CALCulate MOTor SPEed LSCale CALCulate P1X P1Y P2X P2Y Function Sets or queries the data Point1X Point1Y Point2X or Point2Y for parameter calculations of the linear sca
230. nt to make sure that every response is retrieved divide the program messages into individual messages Precautions to Be Taken when Sending and Receiving Messages e If the controller sends a program message that does not contain a query the controller can send the next program message at any time e If the controller sends a program message that contains a query the controller must finish receiving the response message before it can send the next program message If the controller sends the next program message before receiving the response message in its entirety an error will occur A response message that is not received in its entirety will be discarded e If the controller tries to receive a response message when there is none an error will occur If the controller tries to receive a response message before the transmission of the program message is complete an error will occur Ifthe controller sends a program message containing multiple message units but the message contains incomplete units the WT1800 will try to execute the ones that are believed to be complete However these attempts may not always be successful In addition if such a message contains queries the WT1800 may not necessary return responses Deadlock The WT1800 can store at least 1024 bytes of messages in its transmit and receive buffers the number of available bytes varies depending on the operating conditions If both the transmit and receive
231. number Example When lt NRf gt is specified NUMERIC HSPEED MAXIMUM 1 gt 103 79E 00 When NRf is omitted when NUMeric HSPeed NUMber is set to 3 NUMERIC HSPEED MAXIMUM gt 103 79Et 00 1 0185Ef 00 105 27E 00 When NUMeric FORMat is set to FLOat NUMERIC HSPEED MAXIMUM gt N N digit byte number data byte Sequence Description This command is only valid on models with the high speed data capturing HS option The maximum value or minimum value of all the numeric data from the time that capturing started to the current data update is output f lt NRf gt is specified only the maximum value or minimum value of the numeric data of the specified item number is output If NRf is omitted the maximum values or minimum values of the numeric data of the items from 1 to the number specified by the NUMeric HSPeed NUMber command are output in order spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 NUMeric HSPeed NUMber Function Sets or queries the number of numeric data items that are transmitted by the NUMeric HSPeed VALue command Syntax NUMeric HSPeed NUMber lt NRf gt NUMeric HSPeed NUMber lt NRf gt 1 to 30 NUMERIC HSPEED NUMBER 3 NUMERIC HSPEED NUMBER gt NUMERIC HSPEED NUMBER 3 Description This command is only valid on models with the high speed data capturing HS option f you omit the parameters to the NUMeric HSPeed VALue query as many data records as
232. oltage auto range on off statuses of all elements 5 64 INPut VOLTage AUTO ALL Collectively sets the voltage auto range on off status of all elements 5 64 INPut VOLTage AUTO Sets or queries the voltage auto range on off status of the specified element 5 64 ELEMent lt x gt INPut VOLTage Collectively sets the voltage auto range on off status of all the elements that 5 64 AUTO SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or ZC INPut VOLTage CONFig Queries the valid voltage ranges of all elements 5 64 INPut VOLTage CONFig ALL Collectively sets the valid voltage range of all elements 5 65 INPut VOLTage CONFig Sets or queries the valid voltage ranges of the specified element 5 65 ELEMent lt x gt INPut VOLTage POJump Queries the jump destination ranges of all elements that are used when a 5 65 voltage peak over range occurs INPut VOLTage POJump ALL Collectively sets the jump destination range of all elements that is used when 5 65 a voltage peak over range occurs INPut VOLTage POJump Sets or queries the jump destination range of the specified element that is 5 65 ELEMent lt x gt used when a voltage peak over range occurs INPut VOLTage RANGe Queries the voltage ranges of all elements 5 65 INPut VOLTage RANGe ALL Collectively sets the voltage range of all elements 5 65 INPut VOLTage RANGe Sets or queries the voltage range of the
233. on This command is valid when the expression type MEASure EVENt lt x gt EXPRession TYPE is set to RANGe For information about the options available for Function see Function Option List 1 in the DISPlay Group section on page 5 38 f Element is omitted the element is set to 1 If Order is omitted the order is set to TOTal Element and Order are omitted from responses to functions that do not need them Example MEASure EVENt x EXPRession LIMit lt x gt Function Sets or queries the range of the specified user defined event s expression range defined type Syntax MEASure EVENt x EXPRession LIMit x lt Operand gt lt NRf gt MEASure EVENt x EXPRession LIMit x EVENt x s x 1 to 8 Eventl to Event8 LIMit x s s lor 2 lt Operand gt OFF LESS LEQual EQual GReat GEQual NEQual lt NRf gt 1 0000E 12 to 1 0000E 12 Example MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION LIMIT1 LESS 100 MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION LIMIT1 MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION LIMIT1 LESS 100 00E 00 MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION LIMIT2 OFF MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION LIMIT2 gt MEASURE EVENT1 EXPRESSION LIMIT2 OFF Description This command is valid when the expression type MEASure EVENt lt x gt EXPRession TYPE is set to RANGe When lt Operand gt is set to OFF lt NRf gt can be omitted MEASure EVENt lt x gt EXPRession STRing
234. option or the harmonic measurement G5 option HARMonics lt x gt Function Queries all harmonic measurement settings Syntax HARMonics lt x gt x 1 or 2 harmonic measurement group Description HARMonics2 is only valid on models with the simultaneous dual harmonic measurement G6 option HARMonics lt x gt CONFigure Function Queries the harmonic measurement groups of all elements Syntax HARMonics lt x gt CONFigure Description This command is only valid on models with the simultaneous dual harmonic measurement G6 option The x value in HARMonics lt x gt has no meaning in the query HARMonics x CONFigure ALL Function Collectively sets the harmonic measurement group of all elements Syntax HARMonics lt x gt CONFigure ALL lt NR gt lt NRf gt 1 Hrm1 2 Hrm2 Example HARMONICS CONFIGURE ALL 1 Description This command is only valid on models with the simultaneous dual harmonic measurement G6 option The x value in HARMonics lt x gt has no meaning in the setting HARMonics x CONFigure ELEMent x Function Sets or queries the harmonic measurement group of the specified element Syntax HARMonics lt x gt CONFigure ELEMent x lt NRf gt RMonics lt x gt CONFigure ELEMent lt x gt Ment lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 6 element f 1 Hrm1 2 Hrm2 RMONICS CONFIGURE ELEMENT1 1 RMONICS CONFIGURE ELEMENT1 gt HARMONICS1 CONFI
235. or WAVE POSition lt x gt Sets or queries the position of the specified cursor on the waveform display 5 22 CURSor WAVE STATe Sets or queries the on off status of the cursor display on the waveform 5 22 display CURSor WAVE TRACe lt x gt Sets or queries the target of the specified cursor on the waveform display 5 22 CURSor Queries the measured value of the specified cursor on the waveform display 5 22 WAVE X lt x gt DX PERDt YXx DY DISPlay Group DISPlay Queries all display settings 5 23 DISPlay BAR Queries all bar graph display settings 5 23 DISPlay BAR FORMat Sets or queries the bar graph display format 5 23 DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt Queries all the display settings of the specified bar graph 5 23 DISPlay BAR ITEM lt x gt FUNCtion Sets or queries the function and element of the specified bar graph item 5 23 DISPlay BAR ITEM x SCALing Queries all scaling settings for the specified bar graph 5 23 DISPlay BAR ITEM x SCALing Sets or queries the scaling mode of the specified bar graph 5 23 MODE DISPlay BAR ITEM x SCALing Sets or queries the upper limit of the manual scaling of the specified bar 5 23 VALue graph DISPlay BAR ITEM x SCALing Sets or queries the vertical scaling mode of the specified bar graph 5 24 VERTical DISPlay BAR ITEM x SCALing Sets or queries the position of the X axis of the specified bar graph 5 24 XAXis DISPlay BAR ORDer Sets or querie
236. or the linear scale of the torque 5 78 signal analog input type MOTor TORQue LSCale CALCulate Sets or queries the data Point1X Point1Y Point2X or Point2Y for 5 78 P1X P1Y P2X P2Y parameter calculations of the linear scale of the torque signal analog input type MOTor TORQue LSCale CALCulate Calculates parameters for the linear scale of the torque signal analog input 5 78 EXECute type MOTor TORQue PRANge Sets or queries the range of the torque signal pulse input type 5 78 MOTor TORQue RANGe Sets or queries the voltage range of the torque signal analog input type 5 78 MOTor TORQue RATE Queries all torque signal pulse input type rated value settings 5 79 MOTor TORQue Sets or queries the upper or lower limit of the rated value of the torque signal 5 79 RATE UPPer LOWer pulse input type MOTor TORQue SCALing Sets or queries the torque computation scaling factor 5 79 MOTor TORQue TYPE Sets or queries the torque signal input type 5 79 MOTor TORQue UNIT Sets or queries the unit that is added to the torque computation result 5 79 NUMeric Group NUMeric Queries all numeric data output settings 5 80 NUMeric FORMat Sets or queries the numeric data format 5 80 NUMeric HSPeed Queries all numeric data output settings of the high speed data capturing 5 80 mode NUMeric HSPeed CLE
237. orneoiunululo 2 5 11 HSPeed Group HSPeed RECord FILE DRIVe Function Sets the drive that acquired numeric data is saved to Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE DRIVe RAM USB lt NRf gt NETWork RAM Internal RAM drive USB USB memory device drive lt NRf gt 0 or 1 drive number NETWork Network drive Example HSPEED RECORD FILE DRIVE RAM HSPeed RECord FILE FREE Function Queries the free space in bytes on the drive that the acquired numeric data will be saved to Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE FREE Example gt HSPEED RECORD FILE FREE gt 20912128 HSPeed RECord FILE NAME Function Sets or queries the name of the file that acquired numeric data will be saved to Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE NAME lt String gt HSPeed RECord FILE NAME lt String gt File name HSPEED RECORD FILE NAME RECORD1 HSPEED RECORD FILE NAME gt HSPEED RECORD FILE NAME RECORD1 Example HSPeed RECord FILE PATH Function Queries the absolute path of the directory that the acquired numeric data will be saved to Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE PATH HSPEED RECORD FILE PATH gt USB 0 RECORD Example HSPeed RECord FILE STATe Function Queries the status of the file save operation being performed on the acquired numeric data Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE STATe Example HSPEED RECORD FILE STATE gt READY Description The response is as follows
238. r see page 6 5 for details You can determine whether the measured data is being updated by reading bit 0 of the condition register If bit O of the condition register is 1 the measured data is being updated If it is O the measured data can be queried Using the extended event register The changes in the condition register can be reflected in the extended event register see page 6 5 for details Example STATus FILTerl FALL STATus ESE 1 EESR SRE 8 lt PMT gt Read the response to STATus EESR Loop Wait for a service request NUMeric NORMal VALue PMT Read the response to NUMeric NORMal VALue STATus EESR lt PMT gt Read the response to STATus EESR Return to Loop The STATus FILTerl FALL command sets the transition filter so that bit O in the extended event FILTer1 is set to 1 when bit O in the condition register changes from 1 to 0 The STATus EESE 1 command is used to only change the status byte based on bit 0 in the extended event register The STATus EESR command is used to clear the extended event register The SRE 8 command is used to generate service requests based only on the changes in the extended event register bits The NUMeric NORMal VALue command is not executed until a service request is generated Using the COMMunicate WAIT command The COMMunicate WAIT command is used to wait
239. r on the trend display Syntax CURSor TRENd X lt x gt Y lt x gt DY X lt x gt Trend time string of the cursor position X1 D X2 Dx Y x Y axis value of the cursor position Yl Y Y2 Yx DY Y axis difference DY between the cursors CURSOR TREND X1 gt 2010 01 01 12 34 56 CURSOR TREND Y1 gt 78 628E 00 Description If the trend cursor display is not turned on the Example following results will be returned For X lt x gt tries pes w will be returned For Y x and DY NAN Not A Number will be returned CURSor WAVE Function Queries all waveform display cursor measurement settings Syntax CURSor WAVE CURSor WAVE LINKage Function Sets or queries the on off status of the cursor position linkage on the waveform display Syntax CURSor WAVE LINKage Boolean CURSor WAVE LINKage Example CURSOR WAVE LINKAGE OFF CURSOR WAVE LINKAGE gt CURSOR WAVE LINKAGE 0 CURSor WAVE PATH Function Sets or queries the cursor path on the waveform display Syntax CURSor WAVE PATH MAX MIN MID CURSor WAVE PATH Example CURSOR WAVE PATH MAX CURSOR WAVE PATH gt CURSOR WAVE PATH MAX CURSor WAVE POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries the position of the specified cursor on the waveform display Syntax CURSor WAVE POSition x NRf CURSor WAVE POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 1 Cl 2 C2 x
240. rate STORe NUMeric Function Queries all numeric data storage item settings Syntax STORe NUMeric STORe NUMeric ITEM Function Sets or queries the numeric data storage item selection method Syntax STORe NUMeric ITEM DISPlayed SELected STORe NUMeric ITEM DISPlayed Automatic selection method in which all the items that are displayed on the screen are selected SELected Manual selection method Example STORE NUMERIC ITEM SELECTED STORE NUMERIC ITEM gt STORE NUMERIC ITEM SELECTED Description The available options are explained below DISPlayed The numeric items that are displayed on the screen are saved to the file SELected The numeric items that are specified with the commands that start with STORe NUMeric NORMal are saved to the file STORe NUMeric NORMal Function Queries all numeric data storage item settings for the manual selection method Syntax STORe NUMeric NORMal Description This command is valid when the storage item selection method STORe NUMeric ITEM is set to SELected the manual selection method STORe NUMeric NORMal ALL Function Collectively sets the on off status of the output of all element functions when numeric data is stored Syntax STORe NUMeric NORMal ALL lt Boolean gt Example STORE NUMERIC NORMAL ALL ON STORe NUMeric NORMal ELEMent x SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Function Sets or queries the on off sta
241. re Connect a UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair or STP Shielded Twisted Pair cable that is connected to a hub or other network device to the Ethernet port on the WT 1800 rear panel Hub or router that supports 1000BASE T 100BASE TX Controller PC or work station WT1800 e o mn eno ila ogojo Ssa 209 Jogoo oo jogjog o 0o laoag UTP or STP cable Network card straight cable Ethernet port RJ 45 modular jack Notes about Connections To connect the WT1800 to a PC be sure to use straight cables and to connect through a hub or router Proper operation is not guaranteed for a one to one connection using a crossover cable Usea network cable that supports the data rate of your network Note For details on how to connect the WT1800 to a network see section 19 1 Connecting the WT1800 to a Network in the WT1800 User s Manual IM WT1801 02bN IM WT1801 17EN 92ej19 U jouJ9u13 1 4 Configuring the WT1800 Ethernet Settings This section explains the following setting for remotely controlling the WT1800 via the Ethernet interface Network connection timeout setting UTILITY Remote Control Menu Press UTILITY the Remote Control soft key and then the Network soft key to display the following screen Utility System Overview Re
242. ries all efficiency computation settings Syntax MEASure EFFiciency MEASure EFFiciency ETA x Function Sets or queries the efficiency equation Syntax MEASure EFFiciency ETA x OFF P lt x gt PA PB PC PM UDEF lt x gt OFF P lt x gt PA PB PC PM UDEF lt x gt J MEASure EFFiciency ETA lt x gt ETA lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 4 nl to n4 OFF No computation P lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 6 element PA PB PC PZA PXB PXC the available options vary depending on the number of elements PM Pm motor output only on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option UDEF lt x gt s x 1 or 2 Udefl or U MEASURE EFFICIENCY ETA1 P3 PA MEASURE EFFICIENCY ETA1 gt MEASURE EFFICIENCY ETA1 P3 PA Description Set the numerator and then the denominator The denominator can be omitted The denominator is set to OFF when it is omitted The denominator is omitted from the response to a query when it is OFF Example MEASure EFFiciency UDEF x Function Sets or queries the user defined parameters used in the efficiency equation Syntax MEASure EFFiciency UDEF x NONE P lt x gt PA PB PC PM NONE P lt x gt PA PB PC PM NONE P lt x gt PA PB PC PM NONE P lt x gt PA PB PC PM MEASure EFFiciency UDEF x UDEF lt x gt s x lor 2 Udefl or Udef2 NONE No operand P lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 6 element
243. ries the displayed page of the numeric display in 4 Items 8 Items or 16 Items display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PAGE NRf DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PAGE lt NRf gt 1 to 12 page number Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 PAGE 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 PAGE gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 PAGE 1 Description When the page number is set the cursor position moves to the beginning of the page DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PRESet Function Presets the display order pattern of displayed items on the numeric display in 4 Items 8 Items or 16 Items display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal VAL4 VAL8 VAL16 PRESet NRf EORigin FORigin CLRPage CLRA11 lt NRf gt 1 or EORigin element reference reset pattern Element Origin spuewwos uoljesiunwwog lt NRf gt 2 or FORigin function reference reset pattern Function Origin lt NRf gt 3 or CLRPage clear the display items of the current page Clear Current Page lt NRf gt 4 or CLRAI11 clear the display items of all pages Clear All Pages Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 PRESET 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL VAL4 PRESET EORIGIN Description The numeric display item display pattern order will be the same as the order when the displayed items are reset using the ITEM setup menu that is displayed on th
244. rmula TYPE1 TYPE2 TYPE3 SQFORMULA TYPE1 Exclusive OR Can be omitted NUMeric NORMal VALue NUMERIC VALUE IM WT1801 17EN Contents How to Use This Ma nuaAl orescence onai oaod nieo iani an ia naiai iii Chapter 1 Ethernet Interface Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Component Names and Functions ssssssssssssesssssssseee eene nnne nter enne 1 1 Ethernet Interface Features and Specifications ssssssssssssssesse 1 2 Connecting to the Ethernet Interface sssssssssssssssesseseeeeeeee eene nennen nnne 1 3 Configuring the WT1800 Ethernet Settings 1 4 USB Interface 2 1 2 2 2 3 24 Component Names and Functions ssssssssssssssssseeeeee nennen nennen 2 1 USB Interface Features and Specifications sssssssssssssseeeeeneee 2 2 Connecting to the USB Interface ee eret rene tenete drea nare 2 3 Configuring the WT1800 USB Settings eseseeenn menn 2 4 GP IB Interface 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 Component Names and Functions sssssee eene enne 3 1 GP IB Interface Features and Specifications sssssssssssssseeee 3 2 Connecting to the GP IB Interface crrr a ar a aE E aa Eora 3 4 Configuring the WT1800 GP IB SettingS 0 00 00 ccccceeecececee ects scene aeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeea 3 6 Responses to Interface Messa
245. rt format is an extended version of the status report format defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 Service request enable register d i amp OR A i ME tg tg A MSS 7 6 ESBMAVIEESEAV 1 0 Status byte Ras 4 A A Y Service request occurrence Output Error o LS queue queue ET o z 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 Standard event enable register i o tg OR A A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard event register 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 A443 2 1 0 Extended event enable register F 5 t_ I 4 tg tg tig OR A t g ty 1 4 tt A A 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 65 A4 3 241 0 Extended event register A A 15 14 13 12 11 10 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Transition filter A A X 15 14 13 12 11 10 918 7 60 5 4 3 2 1 0 Condition register IM WT1801 17EN 6 1 6 1 About Status Reports Overview of Registers and Queues Name Function Writing Reading Status byte Serial polling RQS STB MSS
246. s in custom display mode 5 25 DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE Changes the directory that files are loaded from or saved to for the numeric 5 25 CDIRectory display in custom display mode DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE Sets the drive that files are loaded from or saved to for the numeric display in 5 26 DRIVe custom display mode DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE Queries the amount of free space in bytes on the drive that files are loaded 5 26 FREE from or saved to for the numeric display in custom display mode 5 2 IM WT1801 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE Aborts a file loading operation for the numeric display in custom display 5 26 LOAD ABORt mode DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE Loads the specified background file for the numeric display in custom display 5 26 LOAD BMP mode DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE Loads the specified display configuration and background files for the 5 26 LOAD BOTH numeric display in custom display mode DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE Loads the specified display configuration file for the numeric display in 5 26 LOAD ITEM custom display mode DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE Queries the absolute path of the directory that files are loaded from or saved 5 26 PATH to for the numeric display
247. s the displayed starting and ending harmonic orders of the bar 5 24 graphs DISPlay HSPeed Queries all high speed data capturing display settings 5 24 DISPlay HSPeed COLumn Queries all column settings of the high speed data capturing mode 5 24 DISPlay HSPeed COLumn ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the specified column display item of the high speed data 5 24 capturing mode DISPlay HSPeed COLumn NUMber Sets or queries the number of columns of the high speed data capturing 5 24 mode DISPlay HSPeed COLumn RESet Resets the column display items to their default values on the high speed 5 24 data capturing mode DISPlay HSPeed FRAMe Sets or queries the on off status of the high speed data capturing mode s 5 24 data section frame DISPlay HSPeed PAGE Sets or queries the displayed page of the high speed data capturing mode 5 25 DISPlay HSPeed POVer Sets or queries the on off status of the display of peak over range information 5 25 in high speed data capturing mode DISPlay INFOrmation Queries all setup parameter list display settings 5 25 DISPlay INFOrmation PAGE Sets or queries the displayed page of the setup parameter list display 5 25 DISPlay INFOrmation STATe Sets or queries the on off status of the setup parameter list display 5 25 DISPlay MODE Sets or queries the display mode 5 25 DISPlay NUMeric Queries all numeric display settings 5 25 DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom Queries all numeric display setting
248. settings Syntax INTEGrate INTEGrate ACAL Function Sets or queries the on off status of integration auto calibration Syntax INTEGrate ACAL lt Boolean gt INTEGrate ACAL Example INTEGRATE ACAL OFF INTEGRATE ACAL INTEGRATE ACAL 0 INTEGrate INDependent Function Sets or queries the on off status of independent element integration Syntax INTEGrate INDependent lt Boolean gt INTEGrate INDependent Example INTEGRATE INDEPENDENT OFF INTEGRATE INDEPENDENT gt INTEGRATE INDEPENDENT 0 INTEGrate MODE Function Sets or queries the integration mode Syntax INTEGrate MODE NORMal CONTinuous RNORmal RCONtinuous INTEGrate MODE NORMal Normal integration mode CONTinuous Continuous integration mode RNORmal Real time normal integration mode RCONtinuous Real time continuous integration mode Example INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL INTEGRATE MODE gt INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL INTEGrate QMODe Function Queries the electric current modes for electric current integration of all elements Syntax INTEGrate QMODe INTEGrate QMODe ALL Function Collectively sets the electric current mode for electric current integration of all elements Syntax INTEGrate QMODe ALL RMS MEAN DC RMEAN AC Example INTEGRATE QMODE ALL DC INTEGrate QOMODe ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the electric current mode for electric current integration of the specif
249. sition of the specified cursor on the bar graph display 5 21 CURSor BAR STATe Sets or queries the on off status of the cursor display on the bar graph 5 21 display CURSor BAR Y lt x gt DY Queries the measured value of the specified cursor on the bar graph display 5 21 IM WT1801 17EN 5 1 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CURSor TRENd Queries all trend display cursor measurement settings 5 21 CURSor TRENd LINKage Sets or queries the on off status of the cursor position linkage on the trend 5 21 display CURSor TRENd POSition lt x gt Sets or queries the position of the specified cursor on the trend display 5 21 CURSor TRENd STATe Sets or queries the on off status of the cursor display on the trend display 5 21 CURSor TRENd TRACe lt x gt Sets or queries the target of the specified cursor on the trend display 5 22 CURSor TRENd X x YXx DY Queries the measured value of the specified cursor on the trend display 5 22 CURSor WAVE Queries all waveform display cursor measurement settings 5 22 CURSor WAVE LINKage Sets or queries the on off status of the cursor position linkage on the 5 22 waveform display CURSor WAVE PATH Sets or queries the cursor path on the waveform display 5 22 CURS
250. size 5 56 IM WT1801 17EN 5 13 INPut Group The commands in this group deal with the measurement conditions of the input elements You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing the keys in the measurement condition setup area the area outlined in blue SCALING LINE FILTER FREQ FILTER SHIFT LINE FILTER SYNC SOURCE NULL and NULL SET SHIFT NULL on the front panel INPut Function Queries all input element settings Syntax INPut INPut CFACtor Function Sets or queries the crest factor Syntax INPut CFACtor lt NRf gt INPut CFACtor lt NRf gt 3 6 INPUT CFACTOR 3 INPUT CFACTOR gt INPUT CFACTOR 3 Example INPut CURRent Function Syntax INPut CURRent INPut CURRent AUTO Function Queries the electric current auto range on off statuses of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent AUTO INPut CURRent AUTO ALL Function Collectively sets the electric current auto range on off status of all elements Syntax INPut CURRent AUTO ALL lt Boolean gt Example INPUT CURRENT AUTO ALL ON INPut CURRent AUTO ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets or queries the electric current auto range on off status of the specified element Syntax INPut CURRent AUTO ELEMent lt x gt lt Boolean gt INPut CURRent AUTO ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element INPUT CURRENT AUTO ELEMENT1 ON INPUT CURRENT A
251. specified element 5 66 ELEMent lt x gt INPut VOLTage RANGe Collectively sets the voltage range of all the elements that belong to the 5 66 SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C INPut WIRing Sets or queries the wiring system 5 66 IM WT1801 17EN 5 9 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page INTEGrate Group INTEGrate Queries all integration settings 5 67 NTEGrate ACAL Sets or queries the on off status of integration auto calibration 5 67 NTEGrate INDependent Sets or queries the on off status of independent element integration 5 67 NTEGrate MODE Sets or queries the integration mode 5 67 NTEGrate QMODe Queries the electric current modes for electric current integration of all 5 67 elements NTEGrate QMODe ALL Collectively sets the electric current mode for electric current integration of all 5 67 elements NTEGrate QMODe ELEMent lt x gt Sets or queries the electric current mode for electric current integration of the 5 67 specified element NTEGrate RESet Resets the integrated value 5 67 NTEGrate RTAL1 STARt END Collectively sets the integration start or end time of all elements for real time 5 67 integration mode NTEGrate RTIMe lt x gt Queries the integration start and end times for real time integration mode 5 68 NTEGrate RTIMe lt x gt STARt END Sets or queries the integration start or end time for real time
252. specify by using the front panel keys This does not allow you to turn the power on and off or change communication settings Output requests for measured and computed data panel setup parameters and error codes can be received Commands such as status report commands can be received Talker Capability The WT1800 can transmit measured and computed data The WT1800 can transmit panel setup parameters and the status byte The WT1800 can transmit error codes when errors occur Note Talk only listen only and controller capabilities are not available on the WT1800 GP IB Interface Specifications Supported Devices Electrical and mechanical specifications Functional specifications Protocol Code Mode Address settings Clearing remote mode National Instruments Corporation PCI GPIB or PCI GPIB PCle GPIB or PCle GPIB PCMCIA GPIB or PCMCIA GPIB GPIB USB HS Driver NI 488 2M Version 1 60 or later complies with IEEE St d 488 1978 See the following table complies with IEEE St d 488 2 1992 ISO ASCII code addressable mode Press UTILITY and then on the Remote Control menu set the communication interface Device to GP IB and the address to a number from 0 to 30 Clear remote mode by pressing LOCAL This key is disabled when local lockout has been activated by a controller Functional Specifications Function Subset Name Description Source handshakin
253. sponse is as follows 50 50A input element maximum current range 50 A 5 5 A input element maximum current range 5A 0 No input element Ifthe parameter is omitted the input element Example types of all elements are output in order starting with element 1 INPut NULL CONDition SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt Function Queries the status of the NULL operation of rotating speed torque or AUX Syntax INPut NULL CONDition SPEed TORQue AUX x x 1 or 2 AUX input channel Example INPUT NULL CONDITION SPEED gt 1 Description The response is as follows 0 NULL feature off 1 NULL feature in operation SPEed and TORQue are only valid on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option e AUX lt x gt is only valid on models with the auxiliary input AUX option INPut NULL CONDition U lt x gt I lt x gt Function Queries the status of the voltage or current NULL operation of the specified element Syntax INPut NULL CONDition U lt x gt I lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 6 element Example INPUT NULL CONDITION U1 gt 1 Description The response is as follows 0 NULL feature off 1 NULL feature in operation INPut NULL STATe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the NULL feature Syntax INPut NULL STATe Boolean INPut NULL STATe Example INPUT NULL STATE ON INPUT NULL STATE gt INPUT NULL STATE 1 INPut NULL T
254. ss is valid until the next time it is changed Device settings at power up The commands that can be used at power up As a basic rule the previous settings the settings that were in use when the WT1800 was turned off are used There are no limitations on the commands that can be used at power up Message exchange options a Input buffer size 1024 bytes b Queries that return multiple response messages See the examples of the commands given in chapter 5 c Queries that create response data when the command syntax is being analyzed All queries create response data when the command syntax is analyzed d Queries that create response data during reception There are no queries of which the response data are created upon receiving a send request from the controller e Commands that have parameters that restrict one another See the examples of the commands given in chapter 5 Items that are included in the functional or composite header elements constituting a command See chapters 4 and 5 Buffer sizes that affect block data transmission When block data is being transmitted the output queue is expanded to match the size of the data that is being transmitted A list of program data elements that can be used in equations and their nesting limitations Equations cannot be used Syntax of the responses to queries See the examples of the commands given in chapter 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
255. ssages are also referred to as interface commands or bus commands They are commands that are issued by the controller They are classified as follows Uni Line Messages A single control line is used to transmit uni line messages The following three messages are available IFC Interface Clear REN Remote Enable IDY Identify IM WT1801 17EN 3 7 e eyieyu grdo B 3 5 Responses to Interface Messages Multi Line Messages Eight data lines are used to transmit multi line messages The messages are classified as follows Address Commands These commands are valid when the instrument is designated as a listener or as a talker The following five commands are available Commands available to a device designated as a listener GTL Go To Local SDC Selected Device Clear PPC Parallel Poll Configure GET Group Execute Trigger Commands available to a device designated as a talker TCT Take Control Universal Commands These commands are valid on all instruments regardless of their listener or talker designation The following five commands are available LLO Local Lockout DCL Device Clear PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure SPE Serial Poll Enable SPD Serial Poll Disable There are other interface messages listener address talk address and secondary commands Interface messages Multi line messages r Uni line messages r
256. st data item NUMeric LIST NUMber Sets or queries the number of numeric list data items that are transmitted by 5 84 NUMeric LIST VALue NUMeric LIST ORDer Sets or queries the maximum output harmonic order of the harmonic 5 84 measurement numeric list data NUMeric LIST PRESet Presets the harmonic measurement numeric list data output item pattern 5 84 5 12 IM WT1801 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page NUMeric LIST SELect Sets or queries the output components of the harmonic measurement 5 84 numeric list data NUMeric LIST VALue Queries the harmonic measurement numeric list data 5 85 NUMeric NORMal Queries all numeric data output settings 5 85 NUMeric NORMal CLEar Clears numeric data output items sets the items to NONE 5 85 NUMeric NORMal DELete Deletes numeric data output items 5 85 NUMeric NORMal ITEM x Sets or queries the specified numeric data output item function element 5 86 and harmonic order NUMeric NORMal NUMber Sets or queries the number of numeric data items that are transmitted by the 5 86 NUMeric NORMal VALue command NUMeric NORMal1 PRESet Presets the numeric data output item pattern 5 86 NUMeric NORMal1 VALue Queries the numeric data 5 86 RATE Group
257. start point of the waveform display data that is transmitted by the WAVeform SEND command Syntax WAVeform STARt lt NRf gt WAVeform STARt lt NR gt 0 to 1601 WAVEFORM START 0 WAVEFORM START WAVEFORM START 0 Example WAVeform TRACe Function Sets or queries the target waveform for the WAVeform SEND command Syntax WAVeform TRACe U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt WAVeform TRACe U lt x gt and I lt x gt s x 1 to 6 element AUX x s x 1 or 2 AUX input channel WAVEFORM TRACE U1 WAVEFORM TRACE gt WAVEFORM TRACE U1 Description SPEed and TORQue can only be selected on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option AUX lt x gt can only be selected on models with the auxiliary input AUX option Example WAVeform TRIGger Function Queries the trigger position of the acquired waveform Syntax WAVeform TRIGger Example WAVEFORM TRIGGER gt 0 Description Because the trigger position is always at the beginning of the waveform display data 0 is returned IM WT1801 17EN 5 101 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 23 Common Command Group The commands in this group are defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 and are independent from the instrument s individual functions There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group CAL Function Syntax Example Description CLS Function Syntax Example Des
258. stored numeric data to files Syntax STORe FILE ANAMing OFF NUMBering DATE STORe FILE ANAMing Example STORE FILE ANAMING NUMBERING STORE FILE ANAMING gt STORE FILE ANAMING NUMBERING STORe FILE CDIRectory Function Changes the directory that stored numeric data is saved to Syntax STORe FILE CDIRectory lt String gt lt String gt Directory name Example STORE FILE CDIRECTORY STORE Description Specify to move up to the parent directory STORe FILE CONVert Function Queries all settings related to the conversion of stored numeric data files into CSV format Syntax STORe FILE CONVert STORe FILE CONVert ABORt Function Aborts the conversion of a numeric data file to CSV format Syntax STORe FILE CONVert ABORt Example STORE FILE CONVERT ABORT STORe FILE CONVert AUTO Function Sets or queries the on off status of the automatic conversion of stored numeric data files to CSV format Syntax STORe FILE CONVert AUTO lt Boolean gt STORe FILE CONVert AUTO Example STORE FILE CONVERT AUTO ON STORE FILE CONVERT AUTO STORE FILE CONVERT AUTO 1 STORe FILE CONVert EXECute Function Converts the specified stored numeric data file to CSV format Syntax STORe FILE CONVert EXECute lt String gt lt String gt File name Example STORE FILE CONVERT EXECUTE STORE1 Description Specify the file name without an extension This command is an ov
259. t HCOPy COMMent Function Sets or queries the comment displayed at the bottom of the screen Syntax HCOPy COMMent lt String gt HCOPy COMMent String Up to 30 characters Example HCOPY COMMENT THIS IS TEST HCOPY COMMENT gt HCOPY COMMENT THIS IS TEST HCOPy EXECute Function Executes a print operation Syntax HCOPy EXECute Example HCOPY EXECUTE Description This is an overlap command HCOPy PRINter Function Queries all print settings for the built in printer Syntax HCOPy PRINter HCOPy PRINter FEED Function Executes a paper feed on the built in printer Syntax HCOPy PRINter FEED Example HCOPY PRINTER FEED Description This is an overlap command HCOPy PRINter FORMat Function Sets or queries the contents that will be printed from the built in printer Syntax HCOPy PRINter FORMat SCReen LIST HCOPy PRINter FORMat SCReen Screen image data LIST Numeric list data Example HCOPY PRINTER FORMAT SCREEN HCOPY PRINTER FORMAT gt HCOPY PRINTER SCREEN IM WT1801 17EN 5 47 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 10 HOLD Group The command in this group deals with the output data hold feature You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing HOLD on the front panel HOLD Function Sets or queries the on off status of the output hold feature for display communication and other types of d
260. t 1 to 6 element lt NRf gt 0 0001 to 99999 9999 INPUT CURRENT SRATIO ELEMENT1 10 INPUT CURRENT SRATIO ELEMENT1 gt INPUT CURRENT SRATIO ELEMENT1 10 0000 Example 5 60 IM WT1801 17EN 5 13 INPut Group INPut CURRent SRATio SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Function Collectively sets the external current sensor conversion ratios of all the elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA XB or 2C Syntax INPut CURRent SRATio SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC NRf NRf 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example INPUT CURRENT SRATIO SIGMA 10 Description SIGMA SIGMB or SIGMC is invalid if the wiring system setting INPut WIRing is made in such a way that the corresponding wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C does not exist INPut ESELect Function Sets or queries the element whose measurement range will be set Syntax INPut ESELect NRf ALL INPut ESELect lt NRf gt 1 to 6 element Example INPUT ESELECT 1 INPUT ESELECT gt INPUT ESELECT 1 INPut FILTer Function Queries all input filter settings Syntax INPut FILTer INPut FILTer FREQuency Function Queries the frequency filters of all elements Syntax INPut FILTer FREQuency INPut FILTer FREQuency ALL Function Collectively sets the frequency filter of all elements Syntax INPut FILTer FREQuency ALL OFF Frequency OFF Frequency filter off lt Frequency gt 100 Hz 1 kHz when th
261. t format The data items are separated by commas 2 When the format is set to FLOat A header for example 260 or 3208 is added in front of each numeric data block A physical value in IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format follows the header The byte order of the data of each item is MSB First Forthe formats of each individual numeric data item see Numeric Data Formats at the end of this group of commands page 5 87 Example NUMeric HSPeed Function Queries all numeric data output settings of the high speed data capturing mode Syntax NUMeric HSPEED Description This command is only valid on models with thehigh speed data capturing HS option The number of numeric data items output by NUMeric HSPeed ITEM lt x gt is determined by NUMeric HSPeed NUMber NUMeric HSPeed CLEar Function Clears high speed data capturing mode numeric list data output items sets the items to NONE Syntax NUMeric HSPeed CLEar ALL lt NR gt lt NR gt ALL Clear all items First NRf 1 to 30 the number of the first item to clear Second lt NRf gt 1 to 30 the number of the last item to clear Example NUMERIC HSPEED CLEAR ALL Description This command is only valid on models with thehigh speed data capturing HS option Ifthe second lt NRf gt is omitted the output item specified by the first lt NRf gt and all following output items up to number 30 are cleared
262. t Aborts the conversion of a numeric data file to CSV format 5 94 STORe FILE CONVert AUTO Sets or queries the on off status of the automatic conversion of stored 5 94 numeric data files to CSV format STORe FILE CONVert EXECute Converts the specified stored numeric data file to CSV format 5 94 STORe FILE DRIVe Sets the drive that stored numeric data is saved to 5 94 STORe FILE FREE Queries the free space in bytes on the drive that the stored numeric data is 5 94 saved to STORe FILE NAME Sets or queries the name of the file that stored numeric data is saved to 5 95 STORe FILE PATH Queries the absolute path of the directory that the stored numeric data is 5 95 saved to STORe INTerval Sets or queries the storage interval 5 95 STORe NUMeric Queries all numeric data storage item settings 5 95 STORe NUMeric ITEM Sets or queries the numeric data storage item selection method 5 95 STORe NUMeric NORMal Queries all numeric data storage item settings for the manual selection 5 95 method STORe NUMeric NORMal ALL Collectively sets the on off status of the output of all element functions when 5 95 numeric data is stored STORe NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the on off status of the output of the specified element or 5 95 ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C when numeric data is stored STORe NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the on off status of the specifie
263. t key to display the following Screen Utility EM n System Overview Remote Control Serial No XXXXXXXXX Network Network Check the serial number z 7 D A Output Items Note Only use one communication interface GP IB USB or Network If you send commands simultaneously from more than one communication interface the WT1800 will not execute the commands properly Install the YOKOGAWA USB TMC Test and Measurement Class driver on your PC For information about how to obtain the YOKOGAWA USB TMC driver contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer You can also access the YOKOGAWA USB driver download web page and download the driver http tmi yokogawa com Do not use USB TMC drivers or software supplied by other companies 2 4 IM WT1801 17EN Chapter 3 GP IB Interface 3 1 Component Names and Functions Front Panel LOCAL key Press this key to switch from remote mode in which settings and operations are performed through remote commands to local mode in which operations can be performed using the WT1800 keys This key is disabled when local lockout see page 3 7 has been activated by a controller e eyieyu grrdo B
264. t x gt EXTernal DISPlay WAVE TRIGger SOURce lt x gt 1 to 6 element EXTernal External trigger input Ext Clk Example DISPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SOURCE U1 SPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SOURCE gt SPLAY WAVE TRIGGER SOURCE Ul c Ivi DISPlay WAVE U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt Function Sets or queries the on off status of the voltage current rotating speed torque or auxiliary signal waveform display Syntax DISPlay WAVE U x I x SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt lt Boolean gt DISPlay WAVE U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt U lt x gt and I lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 6 element AUX lt x gt s x lor 2 AUX input channel DISPLAY WAVE Ul ON DISPLAY WAVE U1 gt DISPLAY WAVE U1 1 Description SPEed and TORQue are only valid on models with the motor evaluation function MTR option e AUX lt x gt is only valid on models with the auxiliary input AUX option Example DISPlay WAVE VZoom Function Queries all waveform vertical zoom factor settings Syntax DISPlay WAVE VZoom DISPlay WAVE VZoom U lt x gt I lt x gt Function Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of the specified element s voltage or current waveform Syntax DISPlay WAVE VZoom U lt x gt I lt x gt NRf DISPlay WAVE VZoom U lt x gt I lt x gt x 1 to 6 element lt NR gt 0 1 to 100 DISPLAY WAVE VZOOM U1 1 DISPLAY WAVE VZOOM
265. t x gt s lt x gt 1 to 6 element Example MEASURE FREQUENCY ITEM1 U1 MEASURE FREQUENCY ITEM1 gt MEASURE FREQUENCY ITEM1 U1 Description On models with the add on frequency measurement FQ option all input elements can be measured simultaneously so it is not necessary to use this command to set the element MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt Function Queries all the settings of the specified user defined function Syntax MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt x 1 to 20 F1 to F20 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt EXPRession Function Sets or queries the equation of the specified user defined function Syntax MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt EXPRession lt String gt MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt EXPRession x 1 to 20 F1 to F20 String Up to 50 characters Example MEASURE FUNCTIONI EXPRESSION WH E1 TI E1 3600 MEASURE FUNCTION1 EXPRESSION MEASURE FUNCTIONI EXPRESSION WH El1 TI E1 3600 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt NAME Function Sets or queries the name of the specified user defined function Syntax MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt NAME lt String gt MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt NAME x 1 to 20 F1 to F20 String Up to 8 characters Example MEASURE FUNCTION1 NAME Fl M M J d EASURE FUNCTION1 NAME EASURE FUNCTION1 NAME F1 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries the on off status of the specified user defi
266. ta is any 8 bit data It is only used in response messages on the WT1800 The syntax is as follows Form Example N lt N digit decimal number gt lt data byte sequence 800 000010ABCDEFGHIJ N Indicates that the data is lt block data gt N indicates the number of succeeding data bytes digits in ASCII code N digit decimal number Indicates the number of bytes of data example 00000010 10 bytes Data byte sequence Expresses the actual data example ABCDEFGHIJ e Data is comprised of 8 bit values 0 to 255 This means that the ASCII code OAH which stands for NL can also be included in the data Hence care must be taken when programming the controller IM WT1801 17EN M9IAJ9AQ BuruueJ60Jd gt 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller Overlap Commands and Sequential Commands There are two types of commands overlap and sequential The execution of one overlap command can start before the execution of the previous overlap command is completed If you specify the voltage range and send the next program message while you are querying the result the WT 1800 always returns the most recent setting 100 V in this case INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMentl1 100V ELEMent PMT This is because the next command is forced to wait until the processing of INPut VOLTage RANGe ELEMent1 is completed This type of command is called a sequential command
267. the MAX HOLD feature see the features guide IM WT1801 01EN IM WT1801 17EN 5 73 5 15 MEASure Group MEASure PC Function Queries all Pc Corrected Power computation settings Syntax MEASure PC MEASure PC IEC Function Sets or queries the Pc Corrected Power equation Syntax MEASure PC IEC lt NRf gt MEASure PC IEC lt NRf gt 1976 1993 MEASURE PC IEC 1976 MEASURE PC IEC gt MEASURE PC IEC 1976 Example Description Specify the publication year of the IEC76 1 in which the Pc equation that you want to use was written MEASure PC P lt x gt Function Sets or queries a Pc Corrected Power equation parameter Syntax MEASure PC P lt x gt lt NRf gt gt MEASure PC P lt x gt x 1 2 P1 P2 NRf 0 0001 to 9 9999 MEASURE PC Pl 0 5 MEASURE PC P1 gt MEASURE PC P1 0 5000 Description These parameters are used when MEASure PC IEC is set to 1976 IEC76 1 1976 Example MEASure PHASe Function Sets or queries the display format of the phase difference Syntax MEASure PHASe lt NRf gt MEASure PHASe lt NRf gt 180 360 MEASURE PHASE 180 MEASURE PHASE gt MEASURE PHASE 180 Example Description When 180 is selected the phase is displayed using 0 to 180 Lead Lag When 360 is selected the phase is displayed using 0 to 360 MEASure SAMPling Function Sets or queries the sampling frequency Syntax MEASure SAMPlin
268. the manual selection method FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal1 ALL Function Collectively sets the on off status of the output of all element functions when numeric data is saved to a file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal ALL lt Boolean gt Example gt FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL ALL ON FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal ELEMent x SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Function Sets or queries the on off status of the output of the specified element or wiring unit 2A 2B or 2C when numeric data is saved to a file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal1 EMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt x gt to 6 Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 ON FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 gt FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 1 Gl E D spuewwos uonesiunwwog FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Function Function Sets or queries the on off status of the specified function s output when numeric data is saved to a file Syntax FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Function Boolean FILE SAVE NUMeric NORMal Function Function URMS IRMS P S Q Example FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL URMS ON FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL URMS gt FILE SAVE NUMERIC NORMAL URMS 1 Description For information about the options available for lt Function gt see Fun
269. the numeric display in 5 28 custom display mode DISPlay NUMeric FRAMe Sets or queries the on off status of the numeric display s data section frame 5 28 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Queries all numeric display settings 5 28 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL Queries all settings of the numeric display in All Items display mode 5 28 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL Queries all column settings of the numeric display in All Items display mode 5 29 COLumn DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL Sets or queries the on off status of the column display all feature of the 5 29 COLumn DAELem numeric display in All Items display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL Sets or queries the on off status of column scrolling of the numeric display in 5 29 COLumn SCRoll All Items display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL Sets or queries the cursor position on the numeric display in All Items display 5 29 CURSor mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL Sets or queries the displayed harmonic order on the harmonic measurement 5 29 ORDer function display page of the numeric display in All Items display mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal ALL Sets or queries the displayed page of the numeric display in All Items display 5 29 PAGE mode DISPlay NUMeric NORMal Sets or queries the numeric display format 5 30 FORMat DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST Queries all numeric display settings in the list display modes 5 30 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal LIST Sets or queries the cursor position on the numeri
270. the status byte register See page 6 3 Executes single measurement the same operation as when SINGLE is pressed TRG TRG Description A multi line message GET Group Execute Trigger will perform the same operation as this command IM WT1801 17EN 5 103 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 5 23 Common Command Group TST Function Syntax Example Description WAI Function Syntax Example Performs a self test and queries the result TST TST gt 0 The self test consists of tests of each kind of internal memory This command returns 0 if the self test is successful and 1 if it is not If the condition of the WT1800 prevents the self test from being executed this happens for example if the WT1800 is performing integration or storage the WT1800 will return an appropriate error code It takes approximately 30 seconds for the test to complete When receiving a response from the WT1800 set the timeout to a relatively large value Holds the execution of the subsequent command until the completion of the specified overlap command WAI WAI Description For information about how to synchronize a program using WAI see page 4 8 The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command 5 104 IM WT1801 17EN Chapter6 Status Reports 6 1 About Status Reports Status Reports The figure below shows the format of status reports that are read by serial polling This status repo
271. ting it to a PC or other device IM WT1801 17EN 3 5 Responses to Interface Messages Responses to Interface Messages Responses to Uni Line Messages e IFC Interface Clear Clears the talker and listener functions Stops data transmission if it is in progress REN Remote Enable Switches between the remote and local modes IDY Identify is not supported Responses to Multi Line Messages Address commands GTL Go To Local Switches the instrument to local mode SDC Selected Device Clear Clears the program message command being received and the output queue see page 6 6 for details Discards OPC and OPC commands that are being executed Immediately aborts WAI and COMMunicate WAIT commands GET Group Execute Trigger The same operation as the TRG command PPC Parallel Poll Configure and TCT Take Control are not supported Responses to Multi Line Messages Universal commands LLO Local Lockout Prohibits switching to local mode by disabling the LOCAL key on the front panel DCL Device Clear The same operation as the SDC message SPE Serial Poll Enable Sets the talker function on all devices on the bus to serial polling mode The controller will poll each device in order SPD Serial Poll Disable Clears the serial polling mode of the talker function on all devices on the bus PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure is not supported What Are Interface Messages Interface me
272. to Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE CDIRectory lt String gt String Directory name HSPEED RECORD FILE CDIRECTORY RECORD Description Specify to move up to the parent directory Example HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert Function Queries all settings related to the conversion of files of acquired numeric data into CSV format Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert ABORt Function Aborts the conversion of the specified file of acquired numeric data to CSV format Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert ABORt Example HSPEED RECORD FILE CONVERT ABORT HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert AUTO Function Sets or queries the on off status of the automatic conversion of files of acquired numeric data to CSV format Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert AUTO lt Boolean gt HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert AUTO HSPEED RECORD FILE CONVERT AUTO ON HSPEED RECORD FILE CONVERT AUTO gt HSPEED RECORD FILE CONVERT AUTO 1 Example HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert EXECute Function Converts the specified file of acquired numeric data to CSV format Syntax HSPeed RECord FILE CONVert EXECute lt String gt lt String gt File name HSPEED RECORD FILE CONVERT EXECUTE RECORD1 Description Specify the file name without an extension Example This command is an overlap command IM WT1801 17EN 5 51 spuewwos u
273. to 5 60 SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C NPut CURRent SRATio Queries the external current sensor conversion ratios of all elements 5 60 NPut CURRent SRATio ALL Collectively sets the external current sensor conversion ratios of all elements 5 60 NPut CURRent SRATio Sets or queries the external current sensor conversion ratio of the specified 5 60 ELEMent lt x gt element INPut CURRent SRATio Collectively sets the external current sensor conversion ratios of all the 5 61 SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC elements that belong to the specified wiring unit ZA 2B or XC NPut ESELect Sets or queries the element whose measurement range will be set 5 61 NPut FILTer Queries all input filter settings 5 61 NPut FILTer FREQuency Queries the frequency filters of all elements 5 61 NPut FILTer FREQuency ALL Collectively sets the frequency filter of all elements 5 61 INPut FILTer FREQuency Sets or queries the frequency filter of the specified element 5 61 ELEMent lt x gt NPut FILTer LINE Queries the line filters of all elements 5 61 NPut FILTer LINE ALL Collectively sets the line filter of all elements 5 61 NPut FILTer LINE Sets or queries the line filter of the specified element 5 61 ELEMent lt x gt INPut FILTer LINE Collectively sets the line filter of all the elements that belong to the specified 5 62 SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC wiring unit ZA 2B or C NPut INDependent Sets or queries the on
274. to the NUMeric HSPeed PRESet command ITEM lt x gt lt Function gt lt Element gt 1 U 1 2 1 3 P 1 4to6 UtoP 2 7to9 UtoP 3 10 to 12 U to P 4 13 to 15 U to P 5 16 to 18 U to P 6 19 to 21 U to P SIGMA 22 to 24 U to P SIGMB 25 to 27 U to P SIGMC 28 to 30 NONE IM WT1801 17EN 5 91 spuewwog uoneaiunwwog 5 18 RATE Group The command in this group deals with the data update rate You can make the same settings and queries that you can make by pressing UPDATE RATE on the front panel RATE Function Sets or queries the data update rate Syntax RATE lt Time gt RATE Time 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1s 28 5 s 105 20 s Example RATE 500MS RATE gt RATE 500 0E 03 5 92 IM WT1801 17EN 5 19 STATus Group The commands in this group are used to make settings and queries related to the status report There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group For information about status reports see chapter 6 STATus Function Queries all the settings for the communication status feature Syntax STATus STATus CONDition Function Queries the contents of the condition register Syntax STATus CONDition Example STATUS CONDITION gt 16 Description For information about the condition register see chapter 6 Status Reports STATus EESE Function Sets or queries the extended event enable register Syntax STATus EESE Regist
275. ts or queries the on off status of the numeric data display on the vector 5 35 display DISPlay WAVE Queries all waveform display settings 5 35 DISPlay WAVE ALL Collectively sets the on off status of all waveform displays 5 35 DISPlay WAVE FORMat Sets or queries the display format of all waveforms 5 35 DISPlay WAVE GRATicule Sets or queries the graticule grid type 5 35 DISPlay WAVE INTerpolate Sets or queries the waveform interpolation method 5 36 DISPlay WAVE MAPPing Queries all split screen waveform mapping settings 5 36 DISPlay WAVE MAPPing MODE Sets or queries the split screen waveform mapping mode 5 36 DISPlay WAVE MAPPing Sets or queries the split screen voltage current rotating speed torque or 5 36 U lt x gt I lt x gt SPEed TORQue AUX lt x gt auxiliary signal waveform mapping setting DISPlay WAVE POSition Queries all waveform vertical position center position level settings 5 36 DISPlay WAVE Sets or queries the vertical position center position level of the specified 5 36 POSition U lt x gt I lt x gt element s voltage or current waveform DISPlay WAVE Collectively sets the vertical positions center position levels of the voltage 5 36 POSition UALL IALL or current waveforms of all elements DISPlay WAVE SVALue Sets or queries the on off status of the scale value display 5 36 DISPlay WAVE TDIV Sets or queries the waveform Time div value 5 36 DISPlay WAVE TLABel Sets or quer
276. ts or queries the on off status of the specified user defined event 5 72 IM WT1801 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page MEASure EVENt x TLABel Sets or queries the string that is displayed when the specified user defined 5 73 event s condition is met MEASure FREQuency Queries all frequency measurement settings 5 73 MEASure FREQuency ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the element whose frequency will be measured 5 73 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt Queries all the settings of the specified user defined function 5 73 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt EXPRession Sets or queries the equation of the specified user defined function 5 73 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt NAME Sets or queries the name of the specified user defined function 5 73 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt STATe Sets or queries the on off status of the specified user defined function 5 73 MEASure FUNCtion lt x gt UNIT Sets or queries the unit that is added to the computation result of the 5 73 specified user defined function MEASure MHOLd Sets or queries the on off status of the MAX HOLD feature used in user 5 73 defined functions MEASure PC Queries all Pc Corrected Power computation settings 5 74 MEASure PC IEC Sets or queries the Pc Corrected Power equation 5 74 MEASure PC P lt x gt Sets or queries a Pc Correcte
277. tup DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE parameter list display CDIRectory Syntax DISPlay INFOrmation Function Changes the directory that files are loaded from STATe Boolean or saved to for the numeric display in custom DISPlay INFOrmation STATe display mode Example DISPLAY INFORMATION STATE ON Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE DISPLAY INFORMATION STATE CDIRectory lt String gt DISPLAY INFORMATION STATE 1 String Directory name Example DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE CDIRECTORY CUSTOM Description Specify to move up to the parent directory IM WT1801 17EN 5 25 5 6 DISPlay Group DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE DRIVe Function Sets the drive that files are loaded from or saved to for the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE DRIVe RAM USB lt NRf gt NETWork RAM Built in RAM drive USB USB memory device drive lt NRf gt 0 or 1 drive number NETWork Network drive DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE DRIVE USB 0 Example DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE FREE Function Queries the amount of free space in bytes on the drive that files are loaded from or saved to for the numeric display in custom display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE FREE DISPLAY NUMERIC CUSTOM FILE FREE gt 20912128 Example DISPlay NUMeric CUSTom FILE LOAD ABORt Function Aborts a file loading operation for the numeric
278. tus of the output of the specified element or wiring unit 2A 2B or C when numeric data is stored Syntax STORe NUMeric NORMal ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC Boolean STORe NUMeric NORMal ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt x gt 1 to 6 M M M Example STORE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 ON STORE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 gt STORE NUMERIC NORMAL ELEMENT1 1 spuewwos uorneoiunululo 2 STORe NUMeric NORMal Function Function Sets or queries the on off status of the specified function s output when numeric data is stored Syntax STORe NUMeric NORMal Function Boolean STORe NUMeric NORMal Function Function URMS IRMS P S Q Example STORE NUMERIC NORMAL URMS ON STORE NUMERIC NORMAL URMS gt STORE NUMERIC NORMAL URMS 1 Description For information about the options available for lt Function gt see Function Option List 1 in the DISPlay Group section on page 5 38 IM WT1801 17EN 5 95 5 20 STORe Group STORe NUMeric NORMal PRESet x Function Syntax Example Presets the output on off pattern of the element functions to be used when numeric data is stored STORe NUMeric NORMal PRESet x x 1 or 2 preset number STORE NUMERIC NORMAL PRESET1 Description For details on the storage item setting patterns that result when the pattern is reset
279. ue RANGe lt Voltage gt MOTor TORQue RANGe Voltage 1 V 2 V 5 V 10 V 20 V Example MOTOR TORQUE RANGE 20V MOTOR TORQUE RANGE gt MOTOR TORQUE RANGE 20 0E 00 Description This command is valid when the torque signal input type MOTor TORQue TYPE is set to ANALog analog input 5 78 IM WT1801 17EN 5 16 MOTor Group MOTor TORQue RATE Function Queries all torque signal pulse input type rated value settings Syntax MOTor TORQue RATE MOTor TORQue RATE UPPer LOWer Function Sets or queries the upper or lower limit of the rated value of the torque signal pulse input type Syntax MOTor TORQue RATE UPPer LOWer lt NR gt lt Frequency gt MOTor TORQue RATE UPPer LOWer lt NR gt 10000 0000 to 10000 0000 lt Frequency gt 1 Hz to 100 MHz Example MOTOR TORQUE RATE UPPER 50 15KHZ MOTOR TORQUE RATE UPPER gt MOTOR TORQUE RATE UPPER 50 0000 15 000E 03 Description This command is valid when the torque signal input type MOTor TORQue TYPE is set to MOTor TORQue SCALing lt NRf gt 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Example MOTOR TORQUE SCALING 1 MOTOR TORQUE SCALING gt MOTOR TORQUE SCALING 1 0000 o PULSe pulse input 3 E MOTor TORQue SCALing 3 Function Sets or queries the torque computation scaling S factor S Syntax MOTor TORQue SCALing lt NRf gt O o 3 3 D 5 Qo o MOTor TORQue TYPE
280. umeric data current will be saved HSPeed RECord Sets or queries whether the specified element or wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C 5 52 TEM P lt x gt PA PB PC of the numeric data active power will be saved HSPeed RECord Sets or queries whether the rotating speed torque or motor output of the 5 52 TEM SPEed TORQue PM numeric data motor will be saved HSPeed RECord Sets or queries whether the specified element or wiring unit ZA 2B or 2C 5 53 TEM U lt x gt UA UB UC of the numeric data voltage will be saved HSPeed RECord ITEM PRESet ALL Sets at the same time whether all numeric data items will be saved 5 53 HSPeed RECord ITEM PRESet Sets at the same time whether the specified element or wiring unit ZA 2B 5 53 ELEMent lt x gt SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC or ZC ofall the types of numeric data will be saved HSPeed RECord ITEM Sets at the same time whether the specified functions of all types of numeric 5 53 PRESet U I P MOTor AUX data will be saved HSPeed RECord STATe Sets or queries whether acquired numeric data is saved to a file 5 53 HSPeed STARt Starts data capturing 5 53 HSPeed STATe Queries the status of high speed data capturing 5 53 HSPeed STOP Stops data capturing 5 53 HSPeed TRIGger Queries all high speed data capturing trigger settings 5 53 HSPeed TRIGger LEVel Sets or queries the trigger level 5 53 HSPeed TRIGger MODE Sets or queries the trigger mode 5 53 HSPe
281. umn display item of the numeric display in matrix display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix COLumn ITEM x NONE lt Element gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix OLumn ITEM lt x gt x gt 1 to 6 column number Element NRf SIGMA SIGMB IGMC lt NRf gt 1 to 6 Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX COLUMN ITEM1 1 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX COLUMN ITEM1 gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX COLUMN ITEM1 1 nA a DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix COLumn NUMber Function Sets or queries the number of columns of the numeric display in matrix display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix COLumn NUMber lt NRf gt DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix COLumn NUMber lt NRf gt 4 6 Example DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX COLUMN NUMBER 4 DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX COLUMN NUMBER gt DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX COLUMN NUMBER 4 DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix COLumn RESet Function Resets the column display items to their default values on the numeric display in matrix display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix COLumn RESet DISPLAY NUMERIC NORMAL MATRIX COLUMN RESET Example DISPlay NUMeric NORMal MATRix CURSor Function Sets or queries the cursor position on the numeric display in matrix display mode Syntax DISPlay NUMeric NORMal M
282. unction gt lt Element gt 1 URMS 1 2 UMN 1 3 UDC 1 4 UAC 1 5 IRMS 1 6 IMN 1 7 IDC 1 8 IAC 1 9 P 1 10 S 1 11 Q 1 12 LAMBda 1 13 PHI 1 14 FU 1 15 FI 1 5 88 IM WT1801 17EN 5 17 NUMeric Group 16 to 30 31 to 45 46 to 60 61 to 75 76 to 90 91 to 105 106 to 120 121 to 135 136 to 255 Pattern 3 ITEM lt x gt ANOaARWDN 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 to 39 40 41 to 59 60 61 to 79 80 81 to 99 100 101 to 119 120 121 to 139 140 141 to 159 160 161 to 179 180 181 to 255 Pattern 4 ITEM lt x gt SOON DAR WDYDM URMS to FI URMS to FI URMS to FI URMS to FI URMS to FI URMS to FI URMS to FI URMS to FI NONE Function URMS UMN UDC UAC IRMS IMN IDC IAC P S Q LAMBda PHI FU FI UPPeak UMPeak IPPeak IMPeak NONE URMS to IMPeak NONE URMS to IMPeak NONE URMS to IMPeak NONE URMS to IMPeak NONE URMS to IMPeak NONE URMS to IMPeak NONE URMS to IMPeak NONE URMS to IMPeak NONE NONE Function URMS UMN UDC UAC IRMS IMN IDC IAC P S on WD SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt Element gt e e IX X OX X X X eX A ee ee Ce a Ce Cae Ce Oe SIGMA SIGMB SIGMC lt Element gt ee ee a ee oz 2X oA er S IM WT1801 17EN 5 89 spuewwoy uoneoiunululo2 5 17 NUMeric Group 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 to 40 41 to 60 61 to 80 81 to 100 101 to 120 121 to 140 141
283. units each response message unit corresponds to one response Separate each response message unit with a semicolon For details on the response message syntax see the next page Example INPUT CFACTOR 3 INDEPENDENT 0 lt RMT gt V amp ME J Unit Unit lt RMT gt RMT stands for response message terminator The response message terminator is NL END IM WT1801 17EN M M AQ BuruueJ60Jd 4 1 Messages Response Message Unit Syntax The response message unit syntax is as follows d Response header Space Response data d Response Header A response header sometimes precedes the response data Separate the data from the header with a space For details see page 4 5 Response Data Response data contains the content of the response If there are multiple data values each data value is separated by a comma For details see page 4 5 Example 100 00E 03 RMT PE Fl WAVE lt RMT gt Data Header Data M If there are multiple queries in a program message responses are returned in the same order that the queries were received in In most cases a single query returns a single response message unit but there are a few queries that return multiple units The first response message unit always corresponds to the first query but the nth response unit may not necessarily correspond to the nth query Therefore if you wa
284. ur 1 00 00 User Defined Events EV1 to EV8 ASCII The character strings that indicate that conditions are met and that conditions are not met the default values are True and False FLOAT Ox3F800000 1 when the conditions are met and 0x00000000 0 when the conditions are not met No items NONE ASCII NAN Not A Number FLOAT Ox7E951BEE 9 91E 37 Other ASCII lt NR3 gt format mantissa up to 5 digits exponent 2 digits Example 123 45 456E 00 FLOAT IEEE single precision floating point 4 byte format Error Data Data does not exist the display shows ASCII NAN Not A Number FLOAT 0x7E951BEE 9 91E 37 Over range the display shows O L Overflow the display shows O F Data over the display shows Error ASCII INF INFinity FLOAT Ox7E94F56A 9 9E 37 Note In 180 Lead Lag display the phase differences PHI of elements 1 to 6 are output in the range between 180 00 to 180 00 with lead D and lag G set to negative and positive values respectively There may be up to six digits in the mantissa of the 2 of power values P S and Q depending on the combination of the voltage range and current range e g the power range For the table of power ranges see the getting started guide IM WT1801 03EN The following values always have three decimal places efficiency values ETA1 ETA2 ETA3 and ETA4 harmonic distortion factor values UHDFk IHDFk and PHDFk and
285. uring Syntax HSPeed STARt Example HSPEED START HSPeed STATe Function Queries the status of high speed data capturing Syntax HSPeed STATe HSPEED STATE READY Description The response is as follows INIT 7 High speed data capturing is being initialized READy High speed data capturing is in stand by STARt High speed data capturing is being performed OFF The WT1800 is not in high speed data capturing mode Example HSPeed STOP Function Stops data capturing Syntax HSPeed STOP Example HSPEED STOP HSPeed TRIGger Function Queries all high speed data capturing trigger settings Syntax HSPeed TRIGger HSPeed TRIGger LEVel Function Sets or queries the trigger level Syntax HSPeed TRIGger LEVel lt NRf gt HSPeed TRIGger LEVel NRf 100 0 to 100 0 HSPEED TRIGGER LEVEL 0 HSPEED TRIGGER LEVEL gt HSPEED TRIGGER LEVEL 0 0 Description This command performs the same setting as the DISPlay WAVE TRIGger LEVel command Example HSPeed TRIGger MODE Function Sets or queries the trigger mode Syntax HSPeed TRIGger MODE AUTO NORMal1 OFF HSPeed TRIGger MODE Example HSPEED TRIGGER MODE AUTO HSPEED TRIGGER MODE gt HSPEED TRIGGER MODE AUTO Description This command performs the same setting as the DISPlay WAVE TRIGger MODE command IM WT1801 17EN 5 53 spuewwos uorneoiunuluio 2 5 11 HSPeed Group
286. y There is no need to use a colon Example INTEGrate MODE NORMal CLS ACAL ON lt PMT gt When Separating Commands with lt PMT gt If you separate two commands with a terminator two program messages will be sent Therefore the common header must be specified for each command even when commands belonging to the same command group are being concatenated Example INTEGrate MODE NORMal lt PMT gt INTEGrate ACAL ON lt PMT gt IM WT1801 17EN 4 3 4 2 Commands Upper Level Query An upper level query is a query that is made by appending a question mark to the highest level command of a group The controller can receive all of the settings in a group collectively by executing an upper level query Some upper level queries of a group which may be comprised of more than three hierarchical levels can cause the WT1800 to transmit all the lower level settings Example INTEGrate lt PMT gt gt INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL TIMER 0 0 0 ACAL 0 lt RMT gt The response to an upper level query can be sent back to the WT1800 as a program message This enables the settings that were present when the upper level query was made to be reproduced later on However some upper level queries do not return setup parameters that are not currently in use Exercise caution because not all of a group s information is necessarily returned in a response Header Interpretation Rules The WT 1800 interprets

WT1800 Precision Power Analyzer Communication Interface Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents